Current and Savings Account Version-1.0 9NT1438

Current and Savings Account Version-1.0 9NT1438
Current and Savings Account
Version-1.0
9NT1438-ORACLE FCUBS V.UM 11.1.US.1.0.0.0
[March] [2011]
Oracle Part Number E51715-01
Document Control
Author: Documentation Team
Group: UBPG
Created on: October 01, 2008
Revision Number: Final
Updated by: Documentation Team
Reviewed by:
Development/Testing teams
Approved by: Software Quality
Assurance Team
Updated on: March 18, 2011
Reviewed on: March 18, 2011
Approved on: March 18, 2011
Current and Savings Account
Table of Contents
1.
ABOUT THIS MANUAL................................................................................................................................ 1-1
1.1
INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.1
Audience ............................................................................................................................................ 1-1
1.1.2
Organization ...................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.3
Related Documents ............................................................................................................................ 1-2
1.1.4
Glossary of Icons ............................................................................................................................... 1-3
2.
CASA - AN OVERVIEW................................................................................................................................ 2-1
2.1
INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.1
Major Features .................................................................................................................................. 2-2
2.1.2
Major Functions ................................................................................................................................ 2-2
3.
MAINTAINING CUSTOMER ACCOUNTS ............................................................................................... 3-1
3.1
INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1
Invoking Customer Accounts Screen.................................................................................................. 3-2
3.1.2
Capturing Main Details ..................................................................................................................... 3-4
3.1.3
Viewing Status Details ....................................................................................................................... 3-8
3.1.4
Indicating Other Options ................................................................................................................... 3-9
3.1.5
Specifying Waiting Period for First Debit and OD Transaction ..................................................... 3-10
3.1.6
Specifying Turnover Limit Preferences............................................................................................ 3-12
3.1.7
Specifying Account Facilities........................................................................................................... 3-12
3.1.8
Viewing Details of Amounts and Dates............................................................................................ 3-14
3.1.9
Viewing Exceptions of a Customer Account .................................................................................... 3-17
3.1.10 Capturing Auxiliary Details............................................................................................................. 3-19
3.1.11 Specifying the Beneficiary Details ................................................................................................... 3-27
3.1.12 Specifying the Checklist Details....................................................................................................... 3-28
3.1.13 Capturing Additional Details........................................................................................................... 3-29
3.1.14 Specifying Interest Details ............................................................................................................... 3-31
3.1.15 Specifying Charge Details ............................................................................................................... 3-39
3.1.16 Specifying Consolidated Charge Details ......................................................................................... 3-40
3.1.17 Specifying BIC Details..................................................................................................................... 3-42
3.1.18 Specifying Account Operating Instruction Details .......................................................................... 3-43
3.2
SPECIFYING US FEDERAL REGULATION DETAILS..................................................................................... 3-44
3.2.1
Specifying Recurring Transfer Details ............................................................................................ 3-46
3.2.2
Specifying Linked Entities................................................................................................................ 3-46
3.2.3
Specifying REG Details ................................................................................................................... 3-48
3.2.4
Specifying Account Status Details ................................................................................................... 3-50
3.2.5
Specifying Restriction Details.......................................................................................................... 3-51
3.2.6
Specifying Currency Limits Details ................................................................................................. 3-54
3.2.7
Specifying MIS Details..................................................................................................................... 3-55
3.2.8
Viewing OFAC Check Response...................................................................................................... 3-57
3.2.9
Specifying Statement Details............................................................................................................ 3-60
3.2.10 Specifying Account Limits................................................................................................................ 3-71
3.2.11 Specifying Joint Holder Details ....................................................................................................... 3-74
3.2.12 Specifying UDF Details ................................................................................................................... 3-75
3.2.13 Specifying Deposits Instructions...................................................................................................... 3-76
3.2.14 Specifying Billing Parameters ......................................................................................................... 3-77
3.2.15 Initiating manual liquidation for bills.............................................................................................. 3-79
3.2.16 Specifying Account Signatory Details.............................................................................................. 3-80
3.2.17 Specifying Details for Balance Report Statement ............................................................................ 3-81
3.3
MAINTAINING ACCOUNT STATEMENT CHARGE CODES ............................................................................ 3-84
3.4
GENERATING A COMBINED ACCOUNT STATEMENT .................................................................................. 3-85
3.4.1
Maintaining Combined Account Statement Parameters .................................................................. 3-86
3.5
VIEWING CUSTOMER ACCOUNT DETAILS ................................................................................................. 3-89
3.6
BALANCE STATEMENT HANDOFF ............................................................................................................. 3-90
3.6.1
Assigning Balance Statement as Job................................................................................................ 3-91
3.6.2
Generation of Ad hoc Reports.......................................................................................................... 3-91
3.6.3
Maintaining Notice Preferences for Withdrawal............................................................................. 3-93
3.6.4
Viewing Cards Details ..................................................................................................................... 3-95
3.6.5
Generating Alert for Secure Overdraft Utilization .......................................................................... 3-96
3.7
MAINTAINING PREFERENCES FOR DOCUMENT DELIVERY MODE ............................................................. 3-99
3.7.1
Viewing the Document Delivery Mode Preferences ...................................................................... 3-102
3.8
PROCESSING ESCROW SWEEPS ............................................................................................................... 3-103
3.9
LEVYING PENALTY INTEREST ON NOTICE ACCOUNTS ............................................................................ 3-104
3.10 MAINTAINING NOTICE PERIOD FOR WITHDRAWAL ................................................................................ 3-107
3.11 VIEWING UTILIZATION OF FREE AMOUNTS ............................................................................................ 3-108
3.12 VIEWING DUMMY NUMBERS ASSOCIATED WITH CIF NUMBER .............................................................. 3-109
3.13 WITHDRAWAL OF FUNDS WITHOUT PENALTY ........................................................................................ 3-110
3.14 CLOSING ACCOUNT ................................................................................................................................ 3-110
3.15 RECORDING DETAILS OF LODGMENT BOOK REQUESTS .......................................................................... 3-112
3.16 QUERYING FOR ACCOUNT STATISTICS ................................................................................................... 3-113
3.17 VIEWING CUSTOMER ACCOUNT BALANCE ............................................................................................. 3-114
4.
MAINTAINING TAX ALLOWANCE LIMIT............................................................................................. 4-1
4.1
4.2
4.3
5.
INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................................... 4-1
MAINTAINING CUSTOMER ACCOUNT TAX ALLOWANCE ............................................................................ 4-1
MERGING CUSTOMERS ............................................................................................................................... 4-2
MAINTAINING CHECK BOOK DETAILS................................................................................................ 5-1
5.1
INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.1
Maintaining Check Book Details ....................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.2
Defining Check Book Details............................................................................................................. 5-2
5.1.3
Viewing the Status of a Check............................................................................................................ 5-5
5.1.4
Viewing Details of a Check and changing its Status.......................................................................... 5-6
5.1.5
Maintaining Check Details ................................................................................................................ 5-6
6.
MAINTAINING ACCOUNT STRUCTURE ................................................................................................ 6-1
6.1
6.2
6.3
7.
INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................................... 6-1
DEFINING ACCOUNT STRUCTURE ............................................................................................................... 6-1
VIEWING ACCOUNT STRUCTURE MAINTENANCE SUMMARY ...................................................................... 6-2
MAINTAINING AMOUNT BLOCKS .......................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1
DEFINING AMOUNT BLOCKS ...................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.1
Defining Amount Block Reasons........................................................................................................ 7-1
7.1.2
Maintaining Individual Amount Blocks ............................................................................................. 7-4
7.1.3
Viewing Amount Block....................................................................................................................... 7-6
7.1.4
Maintaining Consolidated Amount Block Details.............................................................................. 7-8
7.1.5
Maintaining Consolidated Amount Blocks ........................................................................................ 7-9
8.
MAINTAINING STOP PAYMENT DETAILS............................................................................................ 8-1
8.1
INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.2
MAINTAINING STOP PAYMENT ORDERS ..................................................................................................... 8-1
8.2.1
Maintaining Stop Payment Instructions............................................................................................. 8-2
8.3
MAINTAINING STOP PAYMENT ORDER EFT/ACH DIRECT DEBIT .............................................................. 8-5
8.4
VIEWING STOP PAYMENT ORDER EFT/ACH DIRECT DEBIT DETAILS ....................................................... 8-8
9.
GENERATING ACCOUNT STATEMENTS............................................................................................... 9-1
9.1
INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.2
MAINTAINING STATEMENT PREFERENCES .................................................................................................. 9-1
9.3
SPECIFYING FORMAT OF ACCOUNT STATEMENTS ...................................................................................... 9-3
9.3.1
ACST_DETAILED ............................................................................................................................. 9-3
9.3.2
Term Deposit Rate Change Advice Format ..................................................................................... 9-11
9.3.3
Maintaining Account Class Details ................................................................................................. 9-14
9.3.4
Maintaining Message Types ............................................................................................................ 9-14
9.3.5
Maintaining Customer Address ....................................................................................................... 9-23
9.3.6
Maintaining Statement Generation Preference ............................................................................... 9-24
9.3.7
Maintaining Ad Hoc Statement Requests......................................................................................... 9-26
9.3.8
Maintaining Automatic Consolidated Statement Requests .............................................................. 9-29
10.
PROCESSING POST DATED CHECKS ............................................................................................... 10-1
10.1 INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................................... 10-1
10.1.1 Maintaining PDC Products ............................................................................................................. 10-1
10.1.2 Specifying Accounting Entries and Advices for Events.................................................................... 10-3
10.1.3 Specifying Product Preferences....................................................................................................... 10-5
10.1.4 Entering Details of Post Dated Checks............................................................................................ 10-8
10.1.5 Viewing Accounting Entries........................................................................................................... 10-14
10.1.6 Viewing ICFF Details.................................................................................................................... 10-15
10.1.7 Viewing Summary of Post Dated Checks Transaction................................................................... 10-16
10.1.8 Bulk Input of Post Dated Checks ................................................................................................... 10-17
10.1.9 Processing of PDCs that you have entered.................................................................................... 10-22
10.1.10
Liquidation of PDCs .................................................................................................................. 10-22
10.1.11
Cancellation and Reversal of PDCs .......................................................................................... 10-22
10.1.12
Manual Realization of PDCs ..................................................................................................... 10-23
10.1.13
Events and Accounting Roles..................................................................................................... 10-28
10.1.14
Purchase .................................................................................................................................... 10-34
11.
INSTRUMENT DETAILS........................................................................................................................ 11-1
11.1 INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................................... 11-1
11.2 MAINTAINING THE DETAILS OF THE INSTRUMENT .................................................................................... 11-1
11.2.2 Maintaining Instrument Types for Outward Clearing Checks......................................................... 11-3
11.3 MAINTAINING INSTRUMENT TYPES FOR OTHER BANKS ........................................................................... 11-3
11.4 ENTERING INSTRUMENTS TRANSACTIONS ................................................................................................ 11-4
11.4.1 Viewing the Accounting Entries....................................................................................................... 11-8
11.4.2 Charges for the Instrument .............................................................................................................. 11-8
11.4.3 Liquidating the Drafts...................................................................................................................... 11-9
11.4.4 Charges for the Instrument ............................................................................................................ 11-10
11.4.5 Processing Outward Clearing Instruments.................................................................................... 11-11
11.5 EXEMPTING TAX ON INTEREST EARNED ON DEPOSIT ACCOUNTS........................................................... 11-11
12.
12.1
13.
ANNUAL PERCENTAGE YIELD FOR SAVINGS/CHECKING ACCOUNTS................................ 12-1
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................................... 12-1
INSTRUMENT TYPE MAINTENANCE AND CONSOLIDATED CHECK PRINTING ................ 13-1
13.1 INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................................... 13-1
13.1.1 Defining Instrument Types............................................................................................................... 13-1
13.1.2 Viewing the Check Leaf Number and Status.................................................................................... 13-3
13.1.3 Defining Check Details.................................................................................................................... 13-4
13.1.4 FT Upload........................................................................................................................................ 13-5
13.1.5 Associating an Instrument Type with a Settlement Instruction ........................................................ 13-5
13.1.6 MT110 and MT111 Generation ....................................................................................................... 13-6
13.2 MANUAL PROCESSING FOR UNCOLLECTED FUNDS ................................................................................. 13-11
13.3 INTRA-DAY RELEASE OF UNCOLLECTED FUNDS ..................................................................................... 13-13
13.3.1 Querying for Details on Overdrawn Accounts............................................................................... 13-14
14.
OVERDRAFT CHARGE REVERSAL................................................................................................... 14-1
14.1.1 Maintaining Upload Source Code for OD Charge Reversal ........................................................... 14-2
14.1.2 Maintaining Upload Source Preferences for OD Charge Reversal................................................. 14-3
14.1.3 Maintaining Batch Reservation for OD Charge Reversal ............................................................... 14-3
14.2 INTERFACE CLEARING DETAILS ............................................................................................................... 14-6
15.
SUSPICIOUS ACTIVITY REPORTS..................................................................................................... 15-1
15.1 INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................................... 15-1
15.2 PROCESSING SUSPICIOUS ACTIVITIES ....................................................................................................... 15-1
15.3 MAINTAINING PARAMETERS .................................................................................................................... 15-1
15.3.1 Maintaining Product Tolerance Limit Details................................................................................. 15-1
15.3.2 Viewing Product Tolerance Limit Summary Details ....................................................................... 15-2
15.3.3 Maintaining Deposit Turnover Ratio Details .................................................................................. 15-4
15.3.4 Viewing Deposit Turnover Ratio Summary Details ......................................................................... 15-5
15.4 RUNNING BATCHES .................................................................................................................................. 15-6
15.4.1 Significant Balance Change Accounts Batch................................................................................... 15-6
15.4.2 Kiting Report 1 Batch ...................................................................................................................... 15-6
15.4.3 Kiting Report 2 Batch ...................................................................................................................... 15-6
15.4.4 Non Sufficient Fund or Overdraft (NSD or OD)Batch ................................................................... 15-6
15.5 GENERATING REPORTS ............................................................................................................................. 15-6
15.6 MAINTAINING SUSPICIOUS ACTIVITIES REPORT DETAILS ........................................................................ 15-7
15.7 VIEWING SUSPICIOUS ACTIVITIES REPORT SUMMARY DETAILS ............................................................. 15-11
16.
GLOSSARY ............................................................................................................................................... 16-1
16.1
17.
IMPORTANT TERMS .................................................................................................................................. 16-1
REPORTS .................................................................................................................................................. 17-1
17.1
17.2
17.3
17.4
17.5
17.6
17.7
17.8
17.9
17.10
18.
18.1
18.2
17.
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................................... 17-1
CHECK BOOK DETAILS REPORT ............................................................................................................... 17-1
SAVINGS/CHECKING STOP PAYMENT REPORT .......................................................................................... 17-3
CUSTOMER STATISTICS DATA .................................................................................................................. 17-4
ACCOUNT STATEMENT REPORTS .............................................................................................................. 17-6
SIGNIFICANT BALANCE CHANGE ACCOUNTS REPORT ............................................................................ 17-12
KITING REPORT 1 ................................................................................................................................... 17-14
KITING REPORT 2 ................................................................................................................................... 17-16
NON SUFFICIENT FUNDS OR OVERDRAFT REPORT.................................................................................. 17-18
ACH STOP PAYMENT REPORTS .......................................................................................................... 17-20
ANNEXURE A........................................................................................................................................... 18-1
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................................... 18-1
FORMAT OF PD_PDC_CAN MESSAGE TYPE ........................................................................................... 18-1
ANNEXURE B - ACCOUNTING ENTRIES.......................................................................................... 17-1
17.1 ACCOUNTING ENTRIES AND ADVICES FOR CASA .................................................................................... 17-1
17.2 EVENTS .................................................................................................................................................... 17-1
17.3 AMOUNT TAGS ......................................................................................................................................... 17-1
17.4 ACCOUNTING ROLES ................................................................................................................................ 17-2
17.5 EVENT-WISE ACCOUNTING ENTRIES FOR PRODUCTS ................................................................................ 17-5
17.5.1 Accounting Entries for Interest Products......................................................................................... 17-6
18.
18.1
18.2
ANNEXURE C - IC RULE SET-UP........................................................................................................ 18-1
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................................... 18-1
IC RULE MAINTENANCE ........................................................................................................................... 18-1
18.2.1 Interest on Saving and Current Bank Accounts for Retail Customer............................................... 18-2
18.2.2 Debit Interest on Current Accounts ................................................................................................. 18-6
18.2.3 Interest on Current account for Corporate Customer ..................................................................... 18-9
18.2.4 Interest on Saving and Current Bank Accounts for Retail Customer............................................. 18-12
18.2.5 Interest on Saving and Current Bank Accounts for Retail Customer............................................. 18-15
18.2.6 Charge as Dr Interest when the balance is Less than minimum average balance......................... 18-17
18.2.7 Dormancy Charge ......................................................................................................................... 18-20
18.3 UDE VALUE MAINTENANCE .................................................................................................................. 18-21
18.3.1 Interest on Saving and current Bank Accounts for Retail Customer ............................................. 18-22
18.3.2 Debit Interest on Current Accounts ............................................................................................... 18-23
18.3.3 Interest on Current account for Corporate Customer ................................................................... 18-23
18.3.4 Interest on Liqd Before Month End on Saving and Current Bank Accounts For Retail Customer 18-23
18.3.5 Interest on Saving and Current Bank Accounts For Retail Customer ........................................... 18-23
18.3.6 Charge On Less Average Balance ................................................................................................. 18-23
18.4 IC RATES MAINTENANCE ....................................................................................................................... 18-25
1. About this Manual
1.1
Introduction
This manual is designed to help you quickly get acquainted with the Current and Savings Account
sub-module of Oracle FLEXCUBE.
It provides an overview to the module, and provides information on using the Current and Savings
Account sub-module of Oracle FLEXCUBE.
Besides this User Manual, you can obtain information specific to a particular field by placing the
cursor on the relevant field and striking <F1> on the keyboard.
1.1.1 Audience
This manual is intended for the following User/User Roles:
Role
Function
Back office clerk
Input functions for contracts
Back office managers/officers
Authorization functions
Product Managers
Product definition and authorization
End of day operators
Processing during end of day/
beginning of day
Financial Controller / Product Managers
Generation of reports
1.1.2 Organization
This manual is organized into the following chapters:
Chapter 1
About this Manual gives information on the intended audience. It
also lists the various chapters covered in this User Manual.
Chapter 2
CASA - an Overview is a snapshot of the features that the module
provides.
Chapter 3
Maintaining Customer Accounts explains how you can maintain
accounts in your bank for customers
Chapter 4
Maintaining Tax Allowance Limit explains how you can maintain
tax-free allowance limit at the customer account level
Chapter 5
Maintaining Check Book Details gives information pertaining to
1-1
the maintenance of Check books issued to customers.
Chapter 6
Maintaining Account Structure gives details about maintaining
account structures.
Chapter 7
Maintaining Amount Blocks gives details on maintaining amount
blocks placed on customer accounts.
Chapter 8
Maintaining Stop Payment Details explains how you maintain
details of stop payment instructions on Checks issued by
customers.
Chapter 9
Generating Account Statement explains the maintenances for
account statement generation.
Chapter 10
Processing Post Dated Checks describes how Oracle FLEXCUBE
processes post dated Checks.
Chapter 11
Instrument Details explains how the reference information needed
for entry of instrument-based transactions in the Oracle
FLEXCUBE Branch system can be maintained.
Chapter 12
Annual Percentage Yield for Savings/Checking accounts explains
how Annual Percentage Yield (APY) on customer accounts is
processed in Oracle FLEXCUBE
Chapter 13
Instrument Type Maintenance & Consolidated Check Printing
explains how codes for different instrument types are maintained.
Chapter 14
Glossary gives a list of important terms used in the manual.
Chapter 15
Reports gives the list of reports that can be generated for this
module in Oracle FLEXCUBE.
Chapter 16
Annexure A details format of ‘PD_PDC_CAN’ message.
Chapter 17
Annexure B - Accounting Entries gives the event-wise accounting
entries for CASA module.
Chapter 18
Annexure C – IC Rule Set-up gives the IC rule set-up for CASA
module.
1.1.3 Related Documents
•
The Procedures User Manual
•
The Settlements User Manual
1-2
1.1.4 Glossary of Icons
This User Manual may refer to all or some of the following icons.
Icons
Function
New
Copy
Save
Delete
Unlock
Print
Close
Re-open
Reverse
Template
Roll-over
Hold
Authorize
Liquidate
Exit
Sign-off
Help
Add row
Delete
row
Option
1-3
Icons
Function
List
Confirm
Enter
Query
Execute
Query
Refer the Procedures User Manual for further details about the icons.
1-4
2. CASA - An Overview
2.1
Introduction
Current Account and Savings Account, commonly referred to as Savings/Checking, is one of the
modular sub-systems in the Oracle FLEXCUBE system. Through this system your bank can
execute the following functions:
•
Create a customer account
•
Capture details of a Check book issued to a customer
•
For each Check book, the details of which you have maintained, the system generates a
status matrix. This matrix stores the status of each leaf of the Check book. When no
transaction has taken place the status of the Check is stored as ‘unused’. Whenever a
Check based transaction is initiated by Funds Transfer or Data Entry modules the status
of this Check moves from ‘unused’ to ‘used’ in this matrix. Subsequently, if a Check is
canceled or rejected the status can be updated in the status matrix.
•
Apart from this, tracking and upholding a stop payment instruction against Checks, is also
a function that this sub-system supports. These stop payment instructions, normally
coming from a customer against a Check or a series of Check or an amount for which a
Check was issued; are applicable for a period or indefinitely.
Yet another feature supported by Savings/Checking is the facility to define amount blocks for
accounts (as per a customer’s instruction or the instruction of the bank). The system processes
the expiry of such blocks automatically.
To put it briefly in the Savings/Checking sub-system you maintain the following details:
•
Check books issued to customers
•
Amount blocks enforced against accounts
•
Stop payment instructions issued by customers
These details are maintained in what are called data tables and are called forth for interface
during a Check processing by the Data Entry and Funds Transfer systems. These tables are:
•
‘Check Book Details’, ‘Check Status’ and ‘Check Details’ where you maintain Check book
details
•
‘Amount block maintenance’ where you maintain amount blocks against particular
amounts
•
‘Stop Payment’ where you maintain stop payment instructions issued against a Check or
range of Checks
2-1
2.1.1 Major Features
There are three major features this system provides:
•
A service which returns the status of the Check
•
A service which updates the status of the Check
•
A service which will process initiation and expiry of stop payment instructions and amount
blocks
2.1.2 Major Functions
The major functions, which the system provides, are the following:
Maintenance
It provides for maintenance of Check books issued for a customer account,
with a provision to track and update the status of each Check leaf in the
book
Maintenance of stop payment instructions issued by customers based on,
either, Check numbers, or, the amount for which the Check, or Checks,
were issued
A facility to maintain amount blocks on customer accounts
Processing
Whenever a Check-based transaction is initiated, the system will alert the
user about the status of the Check
In case of a stop payment instruction enforced against that account
number, the system will verify whether the details of the Check and the stop
payment instructions match. It will warn the user accordingly, and ask for an
override
In case of amount blocks, the system takes care of the minimum balance to
be maintained in the account while monitoring Limits.
Reports
Two types of reports can be generated:
Details of all Checks processed along with their status.
Details of stop payment instructions enforced against various accounts.
Details of records that have been purged.
Purge
The user has the facility to purge old records which are no longer being
used.
2-2
3. Maintaining Customer Accounts
3.1
Introduction
You can define customer accounts for all the customers of your bank through the ‘Customer
Accounts Maintenance’ screen.
Each account that you define is identified with an account number. The structure of the account
number is based on the Account Mask you have maintained through the Account Parameters
sub-screen of the Bank-wide Parameters screen.
The Account Number can be combination of the CIF Number, the Account Class, Currency, and
any other alphabet/s or number/s of the account or currency as defined.
For an account number, you also need to define (in this screen) other parameters like: the
account class; the type of account - joint or single; the reporting lines for the account; the
currency in which transactions can be passed to this account; the customer’s account limit; the
check book/passbook/ATM facility, the various statuses applicable to the account and so on.
Every account created or modified in Oracle FLEXCUBE needs to be authorized to become
effective. Whenever a new customer account is created or an existing record is modified, the
system generates a notification message on the record authorization. This notification message
can be sent to any external system if required.
3-1
3.1.1 Invoking Customer Accounts Screen
Invoke the ‘Customer Accounts Maintenance’ screen by typing ‘STDCUSAC’ in the field at the top
right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button.
Details maintained in this screen are classified into three broad heads:
Main
Here you maintain the main attributes of each customer
account like the account number, customer code, the account
class, account currency, type of account - single or joint,
account status, other statuses applicable, Check Book
preferences etc.
Auxiliary
Under Auxiliary you can view other details like provisioning
etc.
Beneficiary
Beneficiary details are maintained under Beneficiary head.
Checklist
Under the checklist tab, you can capture document checklist
details for the account.
The ‘Customer Accounts Maintenance - Main’ screen is displayed by default when you invoke the
‘Customer Accounts Maintenance’ screen. The Branch Code of the sign-on branch is on display.
3-2
Branch Code
The system displays the branch code of the sign on branch
Account
You can indicate the account number of the customer. One customer can have any number of
accounts.
The structure of the account number is defined in the customer account mask maintained in the
Account Parameters sub-screen of the Branch-wide parameters screen. The account number can
be a combination of the account class, customer code (CIF Number), serial number or currency
as defined in the customer account mask.
The last constituent of the account number is always a system generated check digit (it could be
alphabetical or numeric depending upon the mask defined).
You cannot alter the relative position of the constituents of customer account (as defined in the
mask) while maintaining actual customer accounts.
Customer Number
If you have included the CIF Number of the customer as part of the Account Mask, the system
automatically defaults the CIF code of the customer in the respective field. You will not be allowed
to modify this code.
However, while defining the Account Mask in the Account Parameters section of the Bank-wide
Parameters screen, if you have specified that the CIF Number should not be a part of the account
mask you will have to specify the customer code manually. A list of all the valid customer codes is
displayed in the available option list. You can select the appropriate.
Customer Name
The name of the customer is displayed based on the CIF ID that you have mentioned in
‘Customer Number’ field.
Currency
You have to identify the currency of the customer account. A list of all the currencies maintained
in the system will be displayed in the available list. You can select the currency of transaction for
the respective account. If the currency of the account is not defined for the current period in the
‘Turnover Limit Maintenance’ screen, you will not be able to save the account.
Refer the section ‘Maintaining Turnover Limits’ in the chapter titled ‘Maintaining Mandatory
Information’ in this User Manual for details about the ‘Turnover Limit Maintenance’ screen.
Account Class
In Oracle FLEXCUBE, you can classify the customer accounts of your bank into different groups.
Each group is referred to as an account class and is maintained in the ‘Account Class
Maintenance’ screen. For each class, you have to define certain common attributes applicable to
all accounts in the particular class.
3-3
While maintaining a specific account you have to identify the class to which the particular account
belongs. You can select the appropriate account class from the list of all the valid account classes
maintained in the system. Account classes that have surpassed their end date (expired) will not
be displayed in the option list.
Refer the chapter ‘Maintaining Mandatory Information’ in the Core Entities User Manual for details
about maintaining account classes.
Old CIF
The system displays the old CIF of the customer if it has changed due to a merger. Otherwise,
this field will be blank.
3.1.2 Capturing Main Details
Description
Provide a brief and meaningful description of the account here. This description also serves as
the account's title and may specify the account such as joint, minor, current, savings, overdraft,
etc. You may specify both the nature and the purpose of the account.
Account Type
You have to indicate whether the account is to be opened only by the account holder or whether it
can be jointly operated.
Country Code
Specify the country of the customer. This adjoining option list displays all valid country codes
maintained in the system. You can choose the appropriate one.
The country information is captured to enable Mantas to analyse the transactions for possible
money laundering activities.
Account Open Date
You have to capture the date on which the account was opened.
Alternate Account Number
You have to define an alternate account number for the account you are defining. The alternate
account number that you specify should be unique for each customer. You can capture the old
account numbers used by your bank before installing the Oracle FLEXCUBE system. The old
account numbers would be mapped with the new account numbers. This would facilitate quick
tracking of the account and generating queries.
In the Data Entry Module, you can input a transaction using the alternate account number instead
of the actual account number.
3-4
Clearing Account Number
The clearing account number for the customer account is generated automatically if you have
opted for auto generation in the Branch parameters. The account number is created according to
the account mask you have maintained for the branch. This will be mandatory, and has to comply
with length of 9 characters and MOD 11 validation, if the value of the UDF ‘Clearing A/C
Mandatory’ is maintained as YES in the Field Name to Value Definition screen.
However, you can choose to change this number here and the system validates this number with
the account mask you have maintained for the branch.
IBAN Account Number
To capture the detail of the IBAN account for a specific customer, you have to enable the ‘IBAN
Required’ option by enabling it. Subsequently, click the ‘M’ button. The IBAN details sub-screen
will be displayed.
In this screen, you can capture the IBAN Account Number as well as the bank code of the bank
where the IBAN account resides.
The bank code and account number that you specify in this field will be validated against the
Bank Code and Account Number masks maintained in the Branch Parameters screen. If the
account Number that you capture is less than the length of the mask and the mask happens to be
numeric, the system automatically appends a zero to get the required length.
After you specify the Bank Code as well as the Account Number the system calculates the check
digit based on the Country Code, Bank Code and Account Number combination.
Legal Title
Specify the legal title of the customer. The adjoining option list displays all the authorized and
active legal titles maintained in the system. You can choose the appropriate one.
The system will print the legal title maintained here, after the customer’s full name with a
comma placed immediately after the last character of the customer name followed by a space, at
the time of report or statement generation or extract generation to the customer’s full name.
System will display only the customer name at the time of account statement generation, if you
have not maintained legal title abbreviation for an account holder.
System will automatically truncate the legal title abbreviation, if the legal title abbreviation is not
fitting in the printable area. It will not truncate the customer name in any situation
The legal title abbreviation is included in the advice format for account statement next to the
customer name.
3-5
Location
An address for a customer account is based on the ‘Location’ and ‘Media’ combination. Location
codes maintained through the ‘Account Address Location Type Maintenance’ screen are made
available against this field. The address maintained here is always the primary or the default
address. Each customer can have several addresses for a particular media. To distinguish
between one address of a customer from another for a given media, it is essential for you to
specify a unique location for each address. Also, if you are amending an address here, the same
gets updated in the ‘Customer Account Address - Detailed’ table after the validations are through.
Media
Indicate the media for which the charge should be levied. Select one of the following options from
the option list:
•
Mail
•
Telex
•
SWIFT
•
Fax
3.1.2.1 Indicating the Mail Code Details of the Customer
Mail code is the return code assigned for the mails, statements sent to the customer upon their
return as invalid. You need to specify the following mail code details:
Mail Code
Specify the mail code. The adjoining option list displays all active mail codes maintained in the
system. You can choose the appropriate one.
This mail code will be printed on all the communication sent to the customer’s address.
Mail Code Description
When you select the mail code, the system populates the corresponding description of the
selected mail code.
Statement Date
Enter the statement date.
Communication
Enter the communication related remarks if any.
In case of multiple accounts for a customer, a single mail code will be attached across all the
accounts belonging to the customer id.
3-6
Status Details
The account status reflects the status of the account. The account may have a No Credit or No
Debit order issued against it or a Stop Payment order or it may have been frozen for some reason
and therefore dormant.
While posting transactions to the customer account, the system checks the status of the account
before the entry is processed. If the status of the account is dormant, then the system will display
an override message indicating the same.
No Debits
No debits can be posted to the account. For example, Silas Marner, a customer of your bank,
going abroad for a year instructs you not to debits his account till his return. You can execute this
instruction by checking this box.
No Credits
No credits can be posted to the customer account by enabling the check box positioned next to
this field
Frozen
If you have frozen a customer account in the ‘Customer Information Maintenance – Basic’ screen
the accounts gets frozen. For instance, at the behest of a court order, the status of the account is
reflected here in the ‘Customer Accounts Maintenance’ screen.
Status Change Automatic
This specification will be defaulted from the account class to which the account belongs.
However, you have the option of changing it at the customer account level. If you check this
option, the status of the account will be changed automatically by the system as per the
conditions maintained in the ‘Status Rule Definition’ screen (invoked from the Account Class
Maintenance screen). If you do not select this option, you have to change the status manually
through the ‘Manual Status Change’ screen.
No Overdraft
It will remain checked by default during overdraft waiting period. It will automatically be
unchecked on the BOD of next working day after the expiry of the overdraft waiting period.
Stop Payments
If a stop payment instruction is issued (for a Check or an amount) against the account number,
the system will automatically check the ‘Stop Payment’ box. When the stop payment instruction is
withdrawn, the status gets updated accordingly. If a customer has requested for stop payment of
multiple Checks, the ‘Stop Payment’ option will continue to remain checked till the last request is
also cancelled. After cancellation of the last stop payment instruction, the option gets updated
(unchecked) immediately.
3-7
Dormant
The system updates this status for an account based on the dormancy days specified in the
Account Class Maintenance screen
Posting Allowed
If checked, indicates that the account class being created is to be used while creating IRA
monetary accounts. Monetary accounts used for IRA need to be distinguished from the other
accounts in Oracle FLEXCUBE, so that these accounts do not come up for posting in the other
Oracle FLEXCUBE screens.
3.1.3 Viewing Status Details
Status
At the time of maintaining a customer account for the first time, the account status will be ‘NORM’
(Normal) by default. The ‘Status Since’ field will display the current system date i.e. the date on
which the account is maintained in the system. The system will update the status whenever a
status change occurs. Therefore, at any point of time, this field will display the current status of
the account. The ‘Since’ field will reflect the date on which the account moves to the current
status.
Subsequently, the system will default the value of CIF Status as available in the ‘Customer
Maintenance’ screen. This status is the worst status among all the loans, savings accounts and
current accounts for the customer in the current branch.
This is done if you have opted for status processing at the ‘Group/CIF’ level as part of your
branch preferences.
Since
The date on which the status of the account is changed to the current status is displayed here
Propagate Reporting Details
This field indicates whether the reporting lines defined for status movement, for the account class
that this account reports to, must also be applicable to it.
The following GL’s are defined in the Account Class Maintenance for posting account balances
when a status movement occurs on any accounts belonging to the account class:
•
The Debit and Credit GL’s to which account balances must be posted, for movement
to each status
•
The Federal Reserve Reporting Debit and Credit GL’s
•
Head Office Reporting Debit and Credit GL’s
When you select this option, the GL’s maintained for the account class will be applicable to the
customer account you are defining in this screen. The reporting lines will be propagated to the
account whenever a status change occurs.
3-8
If you do not want the account class details to be propagated to the account as well, you have the
option of maintaining the status codes and the reporting lines exclusively for an account. You can
achieve this through the ‘Status Details’ screen. Click the ‘Account Status’ button in the Customer
Accounts Maintenance screen to invoke it.
Account Auto Closed
The system checks this box to indicate that the account has been closed automatically through
the auto account closure feature. You will not be allowed to modify this.
Account Derived Status
The system displays the current status of the account here. This is applicable for CASA accounts
(current accounts and savings accounts)
3.1.4 Indicating Other Options
Track Receivable
During liquidation of loan contracts as well as processing of retail teller contracts, if the system
detects insufficient funds in the settlement account, then you can choose to block the subsequent
credit that happens to the settlement account. In other words, the system will track the account
for receivables (credits). As and when a credit happens, the funds will be allocated to the loan or
retail teller contract, for liquidation. If the track receivable option is checked for the account, the
system will track the receivables for the account if sufficient funds are not available in the
account.
The allocation of funds will happen in a sequence that you specify at the account class level.
This is explained in the section titled ‘Maintaining Account Classes’.
Referral Required
Referral refers to the process of handling customer transactions, which force the accounts
involved in such a transaction to exceed the overdraft limit. Examples of typical transactions,
which force an account to move into overdraft, are Payment and Collections, Funds Transfers,
Recurring Transfers or Clearing transactions. Note that you should have checked the box
‘Referral Required’ in the product preferences screen of the aforesaid modules and the Clearing
product applicable to them. The ‘Referral Required’ option is defaulted from the account class
linked to the account. You can change it for a specific account. If an account is marked for
referral, the details of transactions resulting in the account moving into Overdraft will be sent to
the referral queue. Note that charge, fee or interest debited to the customer account will not be
referred to the Referral Queue. You can view referral transactions in the ‘Referral Queue
Summary’ screen
For further details on Referrals refer to the Processing Referrals in Oracle FLEXCUBE chapter of
the Core Entities User Manual.
APY Required
The system displays the option chosen for the account class for this account. If this option is
checked, the system will display the APY (annual percentage yield) for each product in the
detailed statements for the account. You cannot change this option.
3-9
Replicate Customer Signature
The signature of the customer gets defaulted from the account class level to account level. This
value is defaulted only if the customer type is individual with single mode of operation.
Salary Account
Check this box to indicate the salary account which should be selected for loan recovery on
salary credit. By default this option is unchecked.
Dormancy Parameters
If Transaction Code associated with the account has the Consider for Account Activity option
enabled, the dormant status of the account will be updated to Active. Apart from this, you can
specify the parameter that is required for re-activating the account. Choose from the following
options to indicate the re-activation parameters for the dormant account.
•
Debit
•
Credit
•
Any
•
Manual
In case of a transaction, the system will check for the parameter you have specified here and
accordingly change the status of the account. The parameter you specify here will supercede the
parameter you have maintained at the account class level.
3.1.5 Specifying Waiting Period for First Debit and OD Transaction
You can edit or modify the following, first debit and OD transaction waiting period details that are
defaulted from the account class screen:
Debit Waiting Period (in days)
System defaults this information from the account class screen. However, you can modify the
same,
During the debit-waiting period:
•
The account will be in ‘No Debit’ status and system will not allow the customer
initiated debits like Recurring Transfer s or cash withdrawal from ATM.
•
Only system initiated debits like levying service charges on account are allowed.
Besides credits and credit reversals are allowed on the account.
The system will remove the debit block placed on the account only on the BOD of the next
working day, after the expiry of the debit-waiting period. If required, you can also remove this
block manually by modifying the number of days of debit waiting period.
3-10
When some debit transactions occur during the waiting period, the system will allow you to
proceed, only if you have checked the override waiting period checkbox.
OD Waiting Period (in days)
System defaults this information from the account class screen. However, you can modify the
same,
During the overdraft-waiting period, the account will be in ‘No Overdraft ‘status and overdraft on
that account will not be allowed.
When some overdraft transactions occur during the waiting period, the system will allow you
to proceed, only if you have checked the override waiting period checkbox.
Override Waiting Period
Check this box to override the waiting period. If some debits occur on debit waiting period or
overdraft occurs during overdraft waiting period then, system will throw an override and allows
you to proceed.
Note the following:
The number of restriction days is irrespective of holidays and will go by the bank calendar.
Example:
Example 1: Holiday Processing for Account without Overdraft
Account opening date: 5th Jan 2006
Waiting period: 7 days
Holidays: 7th and 12th Jan 2006
Account withdrawal date: 5th Jan + 7 days = 12th Jan
12th Jan is a Holiday, so the account status will actually change on 13th Jan after BOD.
Example 2: Overdraft Set Up On Account Opening Date
Account opening date: 5th Jan 2006
Waiting period: 7 days
Waiting period for accounts with OD: 10 days
Account OD set up date: 5th Jan 2006
3-11
Holidays: 12th and 15th Jan 2006
Account withdrawal date: 5th Jan + 7 days = 12th Jan
OD Start date: 5th Jan + 10 days = 16h Jan (As 15th Jan is a holiday).
12th Jan is a Holiday, so the account status will actually change on 13th Jan BOD.
3.1.6 Specifying Turnover Limit Preferences
The account inherits the turnover limit code linked to the parent account class.
Turnover Limit Code
The system displays the turnover limit code applicable to the account.
3.1.7 Specifying Account Facilities
As part of specifying the account facilities, you can indicate whether the account holder can avail
of the following facilities:
•
A Checkbook facility
•
A passbook facility
•
An ATM facility
You can indicate that the account holder can avail of a Check book, Passbook, ATM facility by
checking the box positioned next to each of these fields.
If you have indicated that the account holder needs to be provided with the check book facility,
you can also specify whether automatic reordering of Check books should be allowed for the
account. In addition, you will have to maintain the check book details through the respective
screen. Similarly, you can choose to indicate that the account holder needs to be provided with a
Passbook and ATM facility.
Although these specifications are defaulted from the account class screen, where you had
maintained these specifications for all accounts belonging to a class, the options specified at the
account level will supersede that specified for the account class.
Check
If checked, indicates that this account holder can avail of a check book facility.
This shall be defaulted from the Account Class screen, where you had defined this facility for all
accounts belonging to a class. The option specified at the account level will supersede that
specified for the account class.
3-12
Passbook
If checked, indicates that this account number can avail of a passbook facility
This shall be defaulted from the account class screen, where you had defined this facility for all
accounts belonging to a class. The option specified at the account level will supersede that
specified for the account class.
ATM
If checked, indicates that this account number can avail of an ATM facility.
This shall be defaulted from the Account Class screen, where you had defined this facility for all
accounts belonging to a class. The option specified at the account level will supersede that
specified for the account class.
3.1.7.1 Specifying Beneficiaries
First Beneficiary
You can nominate two persons who would have the right to the balances in your account after the
account holder’s demise
Subsequent to the account holder, the first beneficiary is called to claim the balances in the
account. If the first beneficiary is no more or is missing then the second beneficiary is called upon
to claim the balances in the account.
Second Beneficiary
You can nominate two persons who would have the right to the balances in your account after the
account holder’s demise.
Subsequent to the account holder, the first beneficiary is called to claim the balances in the
account. If the first beneficiary is no more or is missing then the second beneficiary is called upon
to claim the balances in the account.
3.1.7.2 Specifying Initial Funding
Account Opening Amount
Specify the amount being deposited to open a customer account. While saving the record, the
system checks whether this amount is equal to or greater than the minimum limit maintained for
the linked account class. If the amount is less than the applicable limit, the system will display an
error message. If it is equal to or greater than the limit amount, the system will proceed with
saving.
Input to this field will be mandatory if limit amount has been maintained for the linked account
class.
3-13
Pay-In Option
Indicate the method for initial funding during account creation. Choose one of the following
options:
•
Pay In By Account
•
Pay In By GL
Offset Account
If you have chosen ‘Pay In By Account’, as the pay-in option, you will have to specify the
customer account that should be debited while posting accounting entries. The adjoining option
list displays all valid customer accounts and customer GLs maintained in the system. You can
choose the appropriate one.
If you choose ‘Pay In By GL’, the system will display the offset GL maintained for the branch in
the ‘Certificate of Deposit Payin Parameters Maintenance’ screen.
Waive Account Opening Charges
Check this box to indicate that account opening charges should be waived for individual customer
account.
3.1.8 Viewing Details of Amounts and Dates
In the Customer Accounts Maintenance - Amounts and dates screen you can view all financial
details of this customer’s account along with the details of the previous debit or credit activities.
However, access to all financial information of an account can be restricted for any user. The
financial details of an account include the account balance, the uncleared debit and credit
balances, the debit and credit turnover and the interest details. The turnover limit details of an
account include the current financial period, currency, utilized and unutilized limit balances.
3-14
Click ‘Amounts and Dates’ button in the Customer Accounts Maintenance screen.
3.1.8.1 Viewing Total Available Balance Details
The total available balance displayed by the system includes the initial funding amount and
unutilized line amount (in case the customer enjoys an OD limit).
Example
The customer account has a line with an amount of USD 50,000 linked to it
Case I
•
Account has a Credit balance of USD 1000
•
Total unutilized line amount is USD 50,000
•
Your bank would like to see USD 51,000
The total available balance is displayed as:
3-15
•
Unutilized Line amount USD 50000
•
Total available balance USD 51,000
Case II
•
Account has a Debit balance of USD 2000
•
Total unutilized line amount is USD 48,000
•
Your bank would like to see USD 48,000
The total available balance is displayed as:
•
Unutilized Line amount USD 48,000
•
Total available balance USD 48,000
In the Amounts and Dates screen, you can view the outstanding debit interest and/or charges due
on the account, as on the current date.
You can also view the amount that can be withdrawn against uncollected funds, on the account.
The System computes the allowable amount based on the Withdrawable Uncollected Funds
Basis option specified in the Branch Parameters Preferences screen.
APY Value
The system displays the APY value.
APY Calculation Date
The system displays the APY calculation date.
3.1.8.2 Viewing Unposted Entries
When this branch is under EOD processing, the inter-branch transactions originated from other
branches are tanked. The funds are made available automatically after BOD and till such time
they are treated as unposted items.
3.1.8.3 Viewing Turnover Limit Details
You can view the account balance status with respect to the turnover balance limit set for the
financial period. You can view the financial period, currency, total deposited amount and the
permissible limit for deposits. The period and limit details are inherited from the limit code
associated with the parent account class.
During every credit transaction on the account, the system updates the limit utilization and checks
the balance amount against the permissible threshold. On account of a transaction, if the balance
breaches the limit threshold, the system will display an override message.
3-16
3.1.8.4 Viewing Turnover Amounts
In the Customer Account - Turnover Amounts screen you can view the total turnover of this
customer account from the first date of this month to the current day’s system date. Also, you can
view the accumulated interest associated with debit or credit transactions after the last liquidation.
To view the turnovers for the account, click the ‘Turnover’ button. The Customer Accounts Turnover Amounts screen is displayed.
After maintaining the required details, you can return to the Amounts and dates screen.
3.1.9 Viewing Exceptions of a Customer Account
The system creates exceptions for customer accounts upon recognizing errors. These exceptions
are propagated to the account statement extract during the primary account statement
generation.
You can view the accounts which have exceptions in the Exception Details screen. Click
‘Exception’ button in the Customer Accounts Maintenance screen.
3-17
Alternatively you can also invoke the ‘Exception Details’ screen by typing ‘STDCUEXP’ in the field
at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button.
The Exception Details sub screen displays the exception details as on a statement processed
date.
The system displays the following exception details for the account:
Account number
The system displays the account number for which the exception is generated.
Statement date
The system displays the statement cycle date in which the exception is generated.
Exception type
The system displays the information on whether it is a system generated exception or generated
manually. Here APYE will be system generated exception and Mail code will be a manually
generated exception.
Exception
The system displays the exception name for the account.
The exceptions are fixed and you cannot add or modify an exception. The system lists out the
following possible standard errors as exceptions:
•
Missing APYE - EXCP1_APYE_MISSING
•
Customer having mail codes - EXCP2_CUST_MAILCD
3-18
If a Savings/Checking account has non zero interest rate and non zero average balance and if
the account carries APYE = 0, then the Missing APYE exception will be displayed in the
respective account.
If a customer has a mail code, then the ‘Customer having mail codes’ exception will be displayed
in all the accounts of the customer.
The refreshing of the exceptions codes happens during the periodic statement generation
process. The exception code and the manually assigned mail codes are applicable to all
statements like Combined Account statements, Reg E and Interim statements.
You can also view the exception code summary and details through the ‘Exception Code
Summary’ screen. You can invoke this screen by typing ‘STSCUEXP’ in the field at the top right
corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button.
You can query on records based on the account number. Click ‘Search’ button. The system
identifies all records satisfying the specified criteria and displays the related details for the
account.
3.1.10 Capturing Auxiliary Details
Click on the ‘Auxiliary’ tab to invoke the following screen
3-19
3.1.10.1
Capturing Positive Pay Details
Positive Pay
For the account you are maintaining, you can specify whether you want positive pay facility for
the account or not. When a check comes in for payment, the system validates for any unpaid
record only for those accounts that are under positive pay. For all the other accounts that are not
specified for positive pay, the system does not do any validation before making payments for the
checks.
Funding
If you enable ‘Funding’, accounting entries will be posted by the Positive Pay maintenance/upload
table for the positive pay transaction. You have to enable ‘Positive Pay’ to make use of ‘Funding’
functionality. If ‘Positive Pay’ is not enabled, ‘Funding’ option will not be applicable.
If ‘Funding’ is not selected, accounting entries will not be passed for positive pay transactions.
You cannot enable both ‘Deferred Reconciliation’ and ‘Funding’ functionalities. You have to
choose between either of them for a particular account.
Mod 9 Validation Required
You can enable Mod 9 Validation for positive pay accounts only. Only if positive pay enabled then
Mod 9 Validation will be active.
3-20
In the case of inward clearing of Positive Pay files, if Modulo 9 is enabled for the product, the
system performs a Modulo 9 Validation on any new Check. If the Check fails modulo 9 validations
the system will display an error message on save. In case of check replacement the Modulo 9
Validation is done for the new check number while in case of alphanumeric checks, the system
throws an error message if modulo 9 validation is checked.
When uploading a positive pay Check the system will perform a Modulo 9 Validation if Modulo 9
validation is enabled for the product. If the validation fails, this particular check will not be
uploaded. The same will be valid in case of Check Replacement while for alphanumeric checks,
system will skip the check and display an error.
Validation Digit
Validation digit will be having values only 0 and 9. If validation digit is 9, then 9 - mod 9 remainder
for the check number (Excluding the check digit) should be equal to the check digit for the check
to be passed else the check is rejected.
The check digit is the last digits of the check i.e. if check number is 1800 then check digit is 0.
The mod 9 remainder of the check number should be equal to the check digit for the check to be
passed if validation digit in customer accounts maintenance is 0 else the check is rejected.
Stale Days
If you have specified a positive pay facility for the account you are maintaining, then you have to
indicate the number of stale days for the transaction. If the date of processing happens after the
specified stale date then the transaction gives an exception error. You have to do an override for
this exception.
Branch
Click on the adjoining option list to choose from the list of branches maintained. The positive pay
parking account will be picked from this branch.
Into
Click on the adjoining option list to choose the account into which funds have to be transferred on
receipt of a positive pay instruction. The accounts that satisfy the following conditions will be
available in the list of ‘Positive Pay Parking Account’:
•
Both accounts belong to the same customer
•
The currency of both the accounts is the same
Deferred Reconciliation
Enabling this check box indicates whether or not the Positive Pay account has the Deferred
Reconciliation facility. Deferred Reconciliation is the facility wherein a Positive pay Check, which
is free of any disparity, is cleared by the bank even in the absence of any instruction from the
drawer of the Check. The instruction can be deferred. Deferred Reconciliation function goes
hand-in-hand with the Positive Pay described above and Deferred Reconciliation is applicable
only for Positive Pay Accounts
•
If Positive Pay = No and Deferred Reconciliation = No, the Check is subjected to the
usual validations and is Rejected if:
3-21
¾
There is any discrepancy in the instrument
¾
There is a Stop payment instruction issued against the instrument
•
If Positive Pay = Yes and Deferred Reconciliation = No, Check is subject to the usual
validations and processing
•
If Positive Pay = Yes and Deferred Reconciliation = Yes, and if any one or more of
the three fields viz. Branch, Account No., Check No. , does not match with the
Positive Pay instruction, the Check will be put under Deferred Reconciliation as
Unreconciled
¾
If this unreconciled Check comes in for clearing once again with the same set of
parameters, it is Rejected
¾
If Positive Pay instruction is received for an Unreconciled Check, it is marked
Reconciled and the Check status is marked Liquidated
•
If Positive Pay = Yes and Deferred Reconciliation = Yes, and the Amount field does
not match with the Positive Pay instruction, the check is Rejected outright
All data pertaining to reconciled and unreconciled Checks are maintained and information
regarding account no., Check no., amount and status of the instrument [reconciled or
unreconciled] can be retrieved if needed.
An EOD batch function will purge all reconciled Checks as part of the clearing batch process.
During the upload process, validation is done against all the positive pay, the deferred
reconciliation flags combinations, and all Unreconciled Positive Pay Instructions are marked as
Reconciled and liquidated.
Deferred reconciliation will be overridden by a stop payment instruction if any. An error message
(or an override) will be shown if a Check that comes in for clearing has a stop pay instruction
against it but has no positive pay instruction.
3.1.10.2
Capturing Provisioning Details
An account inherits the provisioning parameters defined for the account class it uses. You can
change the defaulted parameters and make the following specifications, as required, in the
Provision Details section of the Customer Account Maintenance screen.
You can invoke the Provision Percentages screen by clicking on the ’Provisioning Percentage’
button in the Provisioning Details section of the ‘Customer Account Maintenance’ screen.
Auto Provisioning Required
You can indicate whether provisioning is applicable for the account. If you indicate so, the
provisioning batch, when executed, picks up the account for provisioning.
3-22
Exposure Category
If the logic for deriving the exposure category of the CIF or customer group to which the customer
belongs, based on the total exposure, has been maintained in the Exposure Type Category
Linkage maintenance, then the exposure category of the account is identified. If no logic has
been maintained, you can specify the exposure category in the Customer Account Maintenance
screen.
Risk Free Exposure Amount
You can indicate the risk-free collateral amount that would be used in computing the provisioning
amount for the account.
Provisioning Currency
You can indicate the currency in which the provisioning amount must be calculated – either
account currency or local currency. This specification is defaulted from the preferences for the
account class used by the account, and you can alter it if necessary.
In addition to the provisioning preferences listed above, you must also indicate the applicable
provisioning percentage and the discount percentage details in the Provision Percentages screen
that you can invoke by clicking on the ‘Provisioning Percentage’ button in the Provisioning Details
section of the ‘Customer Account Maintenance’ screen.
Account Number
The system displays the customer account number
Status
Specify the status of the account for which you are maintaining provisioning percentages. The
adjoining option list displays all valid status codes maintained in the system. Select the
appropriate one.
3-23
Provision Percent
If you wish to indicate a specific provisioning percentage to be applicable for the account, you can
specify it in the Provisioning Percentage screen.
If you do not specify any provisioning percentage, the provisioning batch picks up the applicable
provisioning percentage from the Exposure Provisioning Percentage Maintenance, for the
exposure category of the account and the account status.
Discount Percent
If you wish to indicate a specific discount percentage to be applicable for the account, you can
specify it in the Provisioning Percentage screen.
If you do not specify any discount percentage, the provisioning batch picks up the applicable
discount percentage from the Exposure Provisioning Percentage Maintenance, for the exposure
category of the account and the account status.
3.1.10.3
Capturing Escrow Transfer Details
Escrow transfer processing refers to transfer of certain percentage of credit amount that comes to
project account (Trust account) to the designated account (Escrow account). This is based on
defined transaction codes and cut-off time defined for the account currency. Transactions with the
transaction code and credit account for which the box ‘Escrow Processing’ is checked in the
‘Transaction Code Maintenance’ screen are considered for the Escrow sweeps. The system
computes percentage of credit amount and places an amount block on project account.
You can view the details of such system generated Escrow amount blocks using the ‘Amount
Block Maintenance’ screen (CADAMBLK) wherein the field ‘Amount Block Type’ will display
‘Escrow’.
3-24
Escrow Transfer Applicable
This box is checked by default if the customer account belongs to an account class for which
Escrow transfer is enabled.
This box should be checked for Project/Trusted account(s) only.
Branch Code
Select the branch code in which the Escrow account has to be created from the adjoining optionlist.
Escrow Account
Select a valid account to be used as an Escrow account from the adjoining option-list. The list
displays all valid accounts based on the selected Escrow branch and the currency of the project
account.
The system does not allow the circular linkage of Project account and Escrow accounts.
Escrow Percentage
Specify the percentage of the credited amount, which has to be transferred to the Escrow
account.
The Escrow percentage specified here will be same for all transactions and will not vary for
different credits like cash, Check, draft etc.
3.1.10.4
Specifying Other Options
Consolidation for Inward Clearing
You need to indicate whether consolidation for inward clearing is required at the Customer
Account level. This option gets defaulted from the Account Class Maintenance screen. If this
option is unchecked in the Account Class Maintenance screen, then it cannot be enabled here.
Back Period Entry Allowed
You can choose to allow the posting of back-valued entries into the account by enabling the Back
Period Entry Allowed option. If you choose not to restrict back period entries, you will be allowed
to post journal entry transactions to past periods as long as the account is open.
This specification is defaulted from the account class linked to the account. You can choose to
change it for a specific account.
While posting back-valued transactions, the System verifies whether the Back Period Entry
Allowed option has been enabled for the account. If the option has not been enabled an error
message is displayed. This check is also performed while uploading journal entry transactions.
3-25
MT210 Required
A Notice to Receive message (MT210) is an advance notification to your account servicing
institution that it will be receiving funds that are to be credited to your bank’s account with that
institution.
For a nostro account, you can specify whether the nostro agent (your account servicing
institution) prefers to receive a Notice to Receive SWIFT message (i.e., MT 210) when it is
debited in the case of a funds transfer. To indicate that the message MT 210 is to be generated
by default whenever the nostro account is the debit account for a funds transfer, select the ‘MT
210 Required?’ checkbox in the Customer Accounts Maintenance screen, for the relevant nostro
account.
If you indicate so, an MT 210 is generated by default whenever this nostro account is being
debited during the posting of accounting entries in any transaction. This preference (to generate
an MT 210 by default) can be over-ridden when you enter a contract involving a debit to the
nostro account.
Once you have specified this preference for a nostro account, you can change it whenever
necessary. For instance, if you have not specified that an MT 210 be generated, you can unlock
the record and specify the generation of MT 210. Conversely, if you have specified that MT 210
generation is applicable, you can unlock the record and specify that it is no longer applicable.
Lodgement Book
If you have allowed the use of lodgment books for an account class, this specification is defaulted
for all customer accounts that use such a class. You can change the Account Class default and
make the required specification.
If you wish to allow orders of lodgment books for individual customer accounts, you can indicate
so, in the Customer Account Maintenance screen, by selecting the Lodgment Book option.
Euro Checks
Euro Checkbook can be issued to a customer whose account has checked for ‘Euro Checks’
option in the customer account maintenance screen the account should be a account with EUR
currency only.
Max No. of Check Rejections
The system defaults the value of maximum number of Check rejections that can be allowed for an
account from the account class. However, you can modify it at the account level.
Note the following:
•
If ‘Max No of Check Rejections’ is not maintained at customer account maintenance,
system will not mark the Check facility to ‘N’ for any number of Check rejections.
•
If the bank resets the check book facility to ‘Y’ which was earlier updated to ‘N’ by
the system because of violation of max no of check rejections, the Check rejection
count will be taken by the system freshly.
3-26
3.1.11 Specifying the Beneficiary Details
Click ‘beneficiary’ tab in the ‘Customer Accounts Maintenance’ screen in order to capture
beneficiary details for the account.
Specify the following details:
Name
Specify the name of the beneficiary of the account.
Date of Birth
Specify the date of birth of the account beneficiary.
Relationship
Specify the relationship that the beneficiary shares with the primary account holder.
Address 1 to 4
Specify the address of the beneficiary.
3-27
Minor
Check this box to indicate that the beneficiary is a minor (less than 18 years old).
Guardian Name
In case the beneficiary is a minor, specify the name of the beneficiary‘s guardian.
Relationship
Specify the relationship that the beneficiary shares with the guardian.
Address 1 to 4
Specify the guardian’s address.
3.1.12 Specifying the Checklist Details
Click ‘Checklist’ tab in the ‘Customer Accounts Maintenance’ screen in order to capture document
checklist details for the account.
Specify the following:
3-28
Mandatory
Specify if the selected document category is mandatory or not by choosing one of the following
options from the drop-down list:
•
No
•
Yes
Checked
Check this box to check if the document is received or not.
Note the following:
•
The checklist from the account class will be defaulted in this screen. When the
account is opened for a customer type and category, the document associated with
that customer type and category will be defaulted in the checklist tab from the
account class maintenance.
•
The addition, deletion and modification of the checklist items in the account class
maintenance screen will be reflected in this screen for the accounts opened
subsequent to the successful authorization of the account class
•
Existing accounts will remain unaffected by the change in account class parameters,
unless amended to include checklist items.
•
System will provide an appropriate error message, if a mandatory document is not
provided. The error message override enables account creation even if a mandatory
document is not provided.
•
If you amend an existing account class to provide check list items, then the new
accounts opened subsequently with the modified account class will request for
verification of all the check list items
3.1.13 Capturing Additional Details
You can capture additional details for the account by clicking the following buttons in the
‘Customer Accounts Maintenance’ screen:
Button
Function
Interest
This invokes the ‘IC Special Conditions Maintenance’
screen.
Charges
This invokes the ‘Account level charges conditions’
screen.
Consolidated
Charges
This invokes the ‘Account Level Consolidated
Charges Conditions’ screen.
BIC
This invokes the ‘Authorized SWIFT BICs for
Customer Account’ screen.
3-29
Button
Function
Instructions
This invokes the ‘Account Operating Instructions
Maintenance’ screen.
Recurring Transfer
s
This invokes the ‘Instruction Diary Summary’ screen.
Linked Entities
This invokes the ‘Linked Entities’ screen.
REG
This invokes the ‘REG Details’ screen.
Account Status
This invokes the ‘Status Details’ screen.
Restrictions
This invokes the ‘Products and Transaction Codes
Restriction’ screen.
Currency Limits
This invokes the ‘Limits’ screen.
MIS
This invokes the ‘Management Information System’
screen.
Statement
This invokes the ‘Statement Details’ screen.
Limits
This invokes the ‘Account Limits’ screen.
Joint Holders
This invokes the ‘Linked Entities’ screen.
Fields
This invokes the ‘UDF’ screen.
Deposits Instruction
This invokes the ‘Deposits Instruction’ screen.
Billing Parameters
This invokes the ‘Billing Parameters’ screen.
Account Signatory
This invokes the ‘Signatory Details’ screen.
Interim
Transactions
Report
This invokes the ‘Interim Transactions Report’ screen.
3-30
Button
Function
Notice
This invokes the ‘Notice Preferences’ screen
Cards
This invokes the ‘Cards Summary’ screen.
OFAC Check
Through this button you can call the OFAC service
and view the response from the OFAC system.
Change Log
This invokes the ‘Customer Address Change Log’
screen.
3.1.14 Specifying Interest Details
You can capture details of interest for the account, using the ‘IC Special Conditions Maintenance’
screen. Click the ‘Interest’ button in the ‘Customer Accounts Maintenance’ screen to invoke this
screen.
3-31
Specify the following details:
Interest Booking Branch
By default, the customer’s account in the current branch will be displayed in this screen (in the
Interest/Charge Booking Account and Interest/Charge Booking Branch fields). However, you have
the option of booking interest/charge to a different account belonging to another branch also. You
can select the Interest/Charge Booking Branch from the option-list available. The accounts
maintained in the selected Booking Branch will be available in the option-list provided for
Interest/Charge Booking Account. You can select the account from this list. Interest/Charge will
be liquidated into the selected account.
Interest Booking Account
You can select the accounts for booking interests on transactions processed at your bank.
At the time of creating an IC product, if you have maintained the booking account type as Interest
(in the ‘Interest and Charges – Product Definition’ screen), the Interest will be liquidated into the
Interest Booking account. By default, the customer’s account in the current branch will be
displayed in this screen (in the ‘Interest Booking Account’ field). However, you have the option of
booking interest to a different account belonging to another branch also. The accounts
maintained in the selected Booking Branch will be available in the adjoining option list. You can
select the appropriate account. Interest will then be liquidated into the selected account.
Charge Booking Branch
By default, the customer’s account in the current branch will be displayed in this screen (in the
Interest/Charge Booking Account and Interest/Charge Booking Branch fields). However, you have
the option of booking interest/charge to a different account belonging to another branch also. You
can select the Interest/Charge Booking Branch from the option-list available. The accounts
maintained in the selected Booking Branch will be available in the option-list provided for
Interest/Charge Booking Account. You can select the account from this list. Interest/Charge will
be liquidated into the selected account.
Charge Booking Account
You can select the accounts for booking charges on transactions processed at your bank
At the time of creating an IC product, if you have maintained the booking account type as Charge
(in the ‘Interest and Charges – Product Definition’ screen), the charge will be liquidated into the
Charge Booking account. By default, the customer’s account in the current branch will be
displayed in this screen (in the ‘Charge Booking Account’ field). However, you have the option of
booking charge to a different account belonging to another branch also. The accounts maintained
in the selected Charge Booking Branch will be available in the adjoining option list. You can
select the appropriate account. Charges will then be liquidated into the selected account.
Interest Statement
You can also indicate if you would like to generate an interest statement for the account. The
Interest Statement will furnish the values of the SDEs and UDEs and the interest rule that applies
on the account.
3-32
Consolidated Charge Branch
By default it will be same as the current branch. However you can select the branch of the
consolidated charge account from the adjoining option list.
Consolidated Charge Account
Select the account that is identified as the master account for collecting the consolidated Fall
Below Fee.
The Fall Below Fee is a kind of fee that is charged if sum of average monthly balance of all the
accounts is less than the minimum required balance.
Note the following:
•
The master account should be in the same currency as of the other account
currencies.
•
For the master account, the field should be left blank. This master account is
maintained as consolidated charge account on the other set of accounts.
•
All the accounts should be belonging to the same customer.
•
The Fall Below Fee is waived if the master account or any one of the account has
overdraft facility.
Dr Cr Advices
You can indicate whether you want to generate an interest liquidation advice for a customer
account. Check the ‘Debit/Credit Advices’ box to indicate that the system must generate payment
advices when interest liquidation happens on an account. The advices are generated in the
existing SWIFT or/and MAIL format. No advices will be generated if you leave this box
unchecked.
The preference you have made in the Customer Account Class screen will be defaulted here.
However, you can choose to change your preference to generate or suppress these Advices.
Interest Start Date
For the account for which you are defining special conditions, you must specify the date from
which you would like to apply interest. Interest for this account will be calculated according to the
special conditions that you define subsequently.
Charge Start Date
For the account for which you are defining special conditions, you must specify the date from
which you would like to apply charges. Charges for this account will be calculated according to
the special conditions that you define subsequently.
3-33
By default, charges on an account would be applied when the free banking period (if any)
elapses. This means that the Charge Start Date is arrived at by the System by adding the Free
Banking Period days (if any, specified for the account class used by the account) to the Account
Opening Date. If no Free Period has been indicated for the account class used by the account,
the Charge Start Date is defaulted to the Account Opening Date (that is, charges on the account
would be applied right from the account opening date) and displayed in the Special Conditions
Maintenance screen.
You can override the default Charge Start Date and specify the desired start date for charge
application.
Product
To calculate interest for an account, you must apply an interest product on the account. To recall,
every interest product that you create is linked to an interest rule. The logic to calculate interest is
built into an interest rule. When you apply an interest product on the account, interest for the
account will be calculated according to the interest rule definition.
For the account for which you are defining special conditions choose the product(s) that you wish
to apply. To recall, you can define a Special Condition for an account only if the account class of
the account has a General Condition defined for the product. Thus, the picklist from where you
select the product for which you want to define a Special Condition will contain products that
satisfy one of the following conditions:
•
a General Condition has been defined for the product and account class combination
•
the product has been defined as a special conditions only product
The interest rule that is linked to the product(s) will determine the interest that is applied on the
account.
You may want to apply more than one interest product on an account. For example, you may
want to pay credit interest on the credit balance maintained in a current account and levy a debit
interest if the account lapses into a debit balance. In order to achieve this, you would have to
apply two products (one defined for credit interest and another defined for debit interest). In this
screen, you can choose the interest products that you want to apply on an account.
The UDE currency, defined for the product (in the Interest Product Preferences screen) that
you apply on the account, is displayed. Note that the UDE values that you specify for the account
subsequently will be taken to be in this currency.
You can opt to generate an advice, for the benefit of the customer, when the values of the UDEs
defined for the interest rule change.
Generate Rate Change Advice
Check the box ‘Generate UDE change advice’ at account level, to indicate that interest rate
change advice has to be generated for the account at EOD. System generates interest rate
change advices for Customer Accounts, Certificate of Deposits and Savings accounts when the
interest rate changes as part of EOD. For those accounts, when interest rate changes the details
are handed off for rate change advice generation and the same is generated in the pre
determined swift format as per MT 935.
3-34
The advice tag used for interest rate change is RTCHG_ADVICE.
The advice format for interest rate change as per MT935 is given below:
Status
Tag
Field Name
Content/Options
Remarks
M
20
Transaction Reference
Number
16x
Unique Transaction
Reference Number
generated by system
O
23
Further Identification
16x
Specifies the kind of
interest rate
Field 23 populated
as per account class
type.
IF Class Type is S or
Y
Tag will be populated
with
Currency+’DEPOSIT
If Class Type is C
Tag will be populated
with
Currency+CURRENT
O
25
Account Identification
35x
Customer Account
Number for which
advice is generated
M
30
Effective Date of New Rate
6!n
Effective date of New
interest rate in
YYMMDD format
New Interest Rate
1!a12d
Indicator (C or D
depending on
whether new interest
rate is a credit or
debit rate) & New
interest rate in
decimal comma
format.
Sender to Receiver
Information
6*35x
M
O
37H
72
M = Mandatory, O = Optional
A rule identifies the method in which interest or charge is to be calculated. An interest rule
consists of System Data Elements and User Data Elements.
3-35
When you apply a product on an account (while defining special conditions for it), interest for the
account will be calculated according to the interest rule that you have linked to the product. That
is, you merely define the following:
•
how the principal should be picked up from the account
•
the period for which you want to apply interest
•
the type of rate (not the numeric value) that should apply
You now have to specify the numeric values of all the UDEs that you identified for the interest
rule. The value that you specify here will be used to calculate interest for the account.
All the UDEs that you have identified for the rule (to which the product is linked) will be displayed
here. The UDEs that are displayed here can be of four types. They are:
•
Credit Rate
•
Debit Rate
•
Amount
•
Number
The interest that you charge on a debit balance is an example of a debit rate. The interest that
you charge on a credit balance is an example of a credit rate.
A User Data Element will be an amount under the following circumstances:
•
In the case of a tier structure, the upper and lower limit of a tier or a tier amount
•
In the case of a charge, when it is indicated as a flat amount
•
Any amount that can be used in the definition of formula(e)
When building an interest rule you may have indicated the UDE to be a number if the interest or
charge is based on the number of transactions or the number of account statements. A UDE
under this category can also be used to store a numerical value that may be used in a formula.
Now, for each of the UDEs that are displayed, you must specify the values individually. If the type
of UDE that you have identified for the rule is a ‘Rate’ element, you can either specify a Rate
Code or enter a “value” for the Rate element.
If you specify a Rate Code for the UDE, the value that you have maintained for the rate code will
be picked up while calculating interest. However, if you choose to enter a “spread” for the Rate
Code, the appropriate value will be computed. (A “Spread” is a positive or negative value that you
add or deduct to the value specified for the Rate Code). If you do not specify a spread, the rate
maintained for the Rate Code will be picked up.
If the type of UDE is an amount, the value that you enter will be in the currency that you specified
in the UDE Amounts Currency field (in the Interest Product Preferences screen). If you specified
the UDE amounts currency as the local currency and the account is in a foreign currency, the
currency conversions will be on the basis of the mid rate for the day.
3-36
The UDE values that you specify here will only be applied to this account
3.1.14.1
Interest Rate Change Advice
For fixed rate deposits, an advice is to be generated to intimate the customer of the rate change a
month in advance.
Check the box ‘Generate UDE change advice’ at Certificate of Deposit account level, to indicate
that interest rate change advice has to be generated for the account at EOD. System generates
interest rate change advices for Customer Accounts, Certificate of Deposits and Savings
accounts when the interest rate changes as part of EOD.
For this you need to maintain the account UDE change batch (ACUDCHD) which is run at EOTI.
The rate change advice will be generated once the account UDE change batch is run at Post
EOTI stage. The system picks all the Certificate of Deposit accounts for the EOD branch for
which ‘Generate UDE change advice’ flag is checked. The UDE value of such accounts changes
for an effective date, which will be 30 days from the system date.
In case of rate change for a particular effective date, UDCH event will be fired. The UDCH event
would be used to generate advice.
For the rate change advice to be generated as part of UDCH event, the effective date input
should be within a month of the account opening date.
The rate change is limited to the fixed rate change IC interest products and not to the floating
rates.
You can use the following format in generating Certificate of Deposit interest rate change advice
(UDECA):
#B
Interest Component Change Advice
CUSTOMER : _CUST_
_CUST-NAME_
_ADDR1_
_ADDR2_
3-37
_ADDR3_
_ADDR4_
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------BRANCH : _BRN_
ACCOUNT : _ACC_
_DESCRIPTION_
CURRENCY : _CCY_
PRODUCT : (_PROD_) _PRODDESC_
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Rates and other interest components have been changed. The details are :
Element
Existing Value
New Value
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------#LOOP
_RCDATE_
_UDE_
_OLDVAL_
_NEWVAL_
#ENDLOOP
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------#EB
For details on advice generation please refer the chapter titled ‘Maintaining Advice Formats’ in
the MS user manual under CORE module.
Waive Product
Check this box if you want to waive of a particular interest or charge product that has been
specified.
Open
More than one product may be applicable on an account class at the same time. You can
temporarily stop applying a product on an account class by ‘closing’ it
3-38
You can achieve this by un-checking the box ‘Open’. The product will cease to be applied on the
account class. You can make the product applicable again by checking the ‘Open’ box.
Effective Date
The ‘Effective Date’ of a record is the date from which a record takes effect. You can maintain
different values for a UDE, for different effective dates, for an account. When interest is calculated
on a particular day for an account with special conditions applicable, the value of the UDE
corresponding to the date will be picked up.
Typically, you would want to open records with different Effective Dates if the values of UDEs
vary within the same liquidation period.
3.1.15 Specifying Charge Details
You can capture details of charges for the account, using the ‘Account level charges conditions’
screen. To invoke this screen, click the ‘Charge’ button in the ‘Customer Accounts Maintenance’
screen.
Branch
The Branch Code to which the account belongs (for which you are defining special conditions) is
displayed in this field.
Account
The Account number of customer (for which you are defining special conditions) is displayed in
this field.
3-39
You can click the ‘Default’ button to default the Charge Products and the corresponding
details applicable for the account. You can then modify these values to define the special
conditions.
3.1.15.1
Specifying Product Details
Specify the following details:
Product
The system defaults a product when you click the ‘Default’ button at the time of account creation.
You must modify it to identify the Charge product using which the applicable charges would be
collected.
Currency
The charges would be collected in the currency defined for the selected charge product, and this
currency is displayed on the screen.
Minimum and Maximum
You must indicate the charge amount range, representing the minimum and maximum charge
that can be applied for the account.
Free Items
You must indicate the number of free items for which the customer will not be charged.
Open
By default, each charge consolidation charge setup that you set up is enabled and active. You
can also disable the setup by checking the ‘Open’ box.
Waive Charges
You can choose to waive charges for an account.
3.1.16 Specifying Consolidated Charge Details
You can capture details of consolidated charges for the account, using the ‘Account Level
Consolidated Charges Conditions’ screen.
3-40
To invoke this screen, click the ‘Consolidated Charge’ button in the ‘Customer Accounts
Maintenance’ screen.
Branch
The Branch Code to which the account belongs (for which you are defining special conditions) is
displayed in this field.
Product
You must identify the consolidated charge product using which the applicable charges would be
consolidated. The charges would be consolidated in the currency defined for the selected
consolidated charge product, and this currency is displayed on the screen.
When you opt for a consolidated charge product, all the consolidated charge parameters defined
for the selected product are defaulted to the account for which the product has been linked. You
can change the default in respect of the following parameters:
•
Minimum and maximum charge
•
Discount percentage and discount amount
Currency
The charges would be consolidated in the currency defined for the selected consolidated charge
product, and this currency is displayed on the screen.
Minimum
You must indicate the minimum charge that can be applied for the account
Maximum
You must indicate the maximum charge that can be applied for the account
Open
By default, each charge consolidation charge setup that you set up is enabled and active. You
can also disable the setup by checking the Open box.
3-41
Waive Charges
You can choose to waive consolidated charges for an account
Discount Amount
In this field, you can indicate the flat discount amount, if any, which would be applicable for the
consolidated charge calculated for the account. After the discounting has been applied, the
Maximum and Minimum validations are performed.
Alternatively, the discount, if any, which is applicable, can be specified as a percentage of the
calculated consolidated charge amount.
Discount Percentage
You can indicate the discount percentage, if any, which would need to be applied to the
calculated charge. After the discounting has been applied, the Maximum and Minimum
validations are performed.
The discount, if any, which is applicable, can also be specified as a flat discount amount.
3.1.17 Specifying BIC Details
You can capture details of all SWIFT BIC that should be allowed for a customer account, using
the ‘Authorized SWIFT BICs for Customer Account’ screen.
To invoke this screen, click ‘BIC’ button in the ‘Customer Accounts Maintenance’ screen.
Account Number
The system defaults the account number of the customer in this field
BIC Code
Specify the BIC here. You can choose any valid BIC maintained in the ‘BIC Code Maintenance’
screen
3-42
Description
The system displays the description for the corresponding BIC that you have specified.
3.1.18 Specifying Account Operating Instruction Details
You can capture details for operating the account, using the ‘Account Operating Instructions
Maintenance’ screen. To invoke this screen, click ‘Instructions’ button in the ‘Customer Accounts
Maintenance’ screen.
The screen is shown below:
Date of Last Maintenance
The current system date is also displayed
Instructions
Specify the instructions to be borne in mind when operating a customer account
Conditions
At the time of maintaining an instruction, you can also specify a condition for displaying the
instructions when transactions pertaining to this account are being processed. The instruction will
be displayed to you when the condition is satisfied.
3-43
3.2
Specifying US Federal Regulation Details
Click Regulation ’Regulation’ to record the regulation details.
Reg E Required
Select this check box if Regulation E is applicable to this customer account.
This check box is selected by default if the parent account class is specified as ‘Reg E Required’
in its account class maintenance. You may un-select this check box if Regulation E is not
applicable to this customer account.
Reg CC Availability
Select this check box if Regulation CC is applicable to this customer account.
This check box is selected by default if the parent account class is specified as ‘Reg CC
Applicable’ in its account class maintenance. You may un-select this check box if Regulation CC
is not applicable to this customer account.
You can allow withdrawal against uncollected funds even on the same day itself. A system
override will be displayed if the account involved is marked as 'Reg CC Applicable' and withdrawn
amount is greater than the Available Balance but less than or equal to Available Balance +
Uncollected Funds.
Reg D Applicable
Select this check box if Regulation D withdrawal limits apply to this account.
Reg D Periodicity
Select the periodicity with which the limits are considered. You can select one of the following:
•
Monthly
3-44
•
According to the statement cycle (primary statement cycle)
•
No periodicity required
Reg D Period – Start Date and End Date
The Start Date and End Date will be updated as per the Reg D Periodicity specified.
The start date for Regulation D applicability is first set to be the date on which you mark the
availability option in this screen. Subsequent to the first period, the EOD process would update
the start date according to the periodicity defined.
Subsequent to the first period, the EOD process would update the end date according to the
periodicity defined.
Reg O Code
Click Regulation ’Regulation’ to record the Regulation O details.
Reg O Code
Specify the Reg O code here by selecting it from the list available. This list shows all Reg O
codes maintained in the Reg O Maintenance screen.
By default the REG O Code is ‘0’ (zero). If you leave it unchanged, then on saving the record the
following notification is displayed:
Value of Reg O Code is same as Default Value
Reg P Opt Out
Check this box to indicate that the customer has opted for non-disclosure of Non Public Personal
Information. Based on this maintenance you must manually make sure whether or not you can
disclose the customer's Non Public Personal Information to non-affiliated third parties.
3-45
3.2.1 Specifying Recurring Transfer Details
You can capture details of Recurring Transfer s for the account, using the ‘Instruction Diary
Summary’ screen. To invoke this screen; click the ‘Recurring Transfer s’ button in the ‘Customer
Accounts Maintenance’ screen.
Here you can view the following details:
•
Authorization status
•
Record status
•
Instruction number
•
Unit type
•
Unit value
•
Branch code
•
Instruction
•
Instruction type
3.2.2 Specifying Linked Entities
You can capture details of linked entities for the account, using the ‘Linked Entities’ screen. To
invoke this screen; click the ‘Linked Entities’ button in the ‘Customer Accounts Maintenance’
screen.
3-46
Customer
Select the customer from the option list with whom you want to establish the relationship with the
customer account that you are maintaining.
Description
In this field, the system displays the name of customer that you have selected in the previous
field. You cannot change the description.
Relationship
You have to choose a relationship code to establish a relationship between the customer being
selected and the customer account you are maintaining.
By default, the system will select the customer of the account as the Primary Holder. This is a
pre-shipped relationship and you will not be allowed to change the relationship.
Mailing Label
You have to select the address to which the customer communications are to be sent.
Mailing label enables you to mark where the statements of an account are to be sent or received.
The mailing address given under the mailing label could either be the primary or the seasonal
mailing address of the customer.
By default the system enables the mailing label for primary customer. However you can overwrite
the mailing label for an account, if it is attached to any combined statement plan. You are
allowed to mark mailing label to any of the joint holder customers during account opening.
The first line of the mailing label will direct all mailings to the address of the customer for whom
the mailing field is set. System sends an additional statement to a different address and only one
statement to the non-primary owner of the account.
3-47
You cannot modify the mailing label for an account, if it has been updated by the system during
authorization of the combined statement plan.
An account can have only one mailing label. Multiple addresses can be maintained for an account
based on the date range. For a customer with no multiple addresses, and when a record is saved
with no mailing address is saved, the address from the CIF main screen will be considered for all
correspondence.
3.2.3 Specifying REG Details
Reserve Requirements for Depository Institutions (Regulation D) is a US Federal Reserve Board
regulation that limits the number of preauthorized withdrawals and transfers from a savings
account or money market account. The regulation applies to all United States banking institutions
offering such accounts. In consumer banking, ‘Regulation D’ often refers to §204.2(d)(2) of the
regulation, which places a limit of six withdrawals or outgoing transfers per month from savings or
money market accounts via several transaction methods.
The Expedited Funds Availability Act (EFA or EFAA) was enacted in 1987 by the United States
Congress in order to standardise hold periods on deposits made to commercial banks and to
regulate institutions' use of deposit holds. It is called as Regulation CC or Reg CC after the
Federal Reserve regulation that implemented the act. Regulation CC stipulates four types of
holds that a bank may place on a Check deposit, at its discretion.
You can capture limited Regulation D and regulation CC details for the customer account, using
the ‘REG Details’ screen. To invoke this screen, click the ‘REG’ button in the ‘Customer Accounts
Maintenance’ screen.The screen is shown below:
Reg CC Availability
Check this box if the check deposits into this account should be considered for Regulation CC
aggregation.
3-48
Reg E Applicable
Check this box to indicate that Regulation E is applicable for all accounts, thereby tracking all
accounts undergoing EFT transactions.
Overdraft Protection
Select your preference for overdraft from the drop-down list. You can choose to opt in or opt out
from the overdraft facility. The drop-down list displays the following options:
•
Opt In
•
Opt Out
REGDD Applicable
Check this box to indicate that the IC product can be used for APY/APYE calculation. However,
this is defaulted from the Account Class maintenance.
REGDD Product
Specify the IC product required for APY/APYE calculation.
Overdraft Protection Limit Amount
Specify the overdraft limit amount. The system displays an error message if this is left blank when
you have opted in for the overdraft facility.
Reg D Period
Specify the following details.
Reg D Applicable
Indicate whether the Regulation D limits are applicable for the account
Periodicity
If you indicate the periodicity of Regulation D applicability as ‘Statement Cycle’, the restricted
transactions would be counted over the primary statement cycle defined for the customer
account.
Start Date
The start date for Regulation D applicability is first set to be the date on which you mark the
availability option in this screen. Subsequent to the first period, the EOD process would update
the start date according to the periodicity defined.
End Date
Subsequent to the first period, the EOD process would update the end date according to the
periodicity defined.
3-49
Electronic Data Sharing
Check this box to indicate that the customer has agreed to be a part of the bank’s electronic data
sharing program.
Electronic Data Sharing Effective Date
Specify the date after which the electronic data sharing should be applicable.
This date must be greater than the account opening date.
3.2.4 Specifying Account Status Details
You can specify status details for the account, using the ‘Status Details’ screen. To invoke this
screen, click the ‘Account Status’ button in the ‘Customer Accounts Maintenance’ screen.
Here you can capture the following details:
Branch
The system defaults the code of the current branch
Account Number
The system defaults the account number from the main screen
Status
You can select the different status codes applicable to the account class, in this field. Use the
Add icon to define each status and the attributes for the same. You can use the navigation icons
to move from one status to the other.
On selection of the status, the associated description will be displayed alongside
3-50
Dr and Cr GL Line
Select the debit GL account, to which all debit balances within a specific account class will report
to, when it moves to the status being defined. You can identify the debit GL from the list of
existing GLs. Likewise, all credits within a particular account class will report to the GL account
that you have identified to track credits.
Dr Federal Reserve Line
Specify the Federal Reserve line to which this account will report to, if it is in debit. This line is
maintained in the ‘Reporting Lines Maintenance’ screen.
Cr Federal Reserve Line
Specify the Federal Reserve line to which this account will report to, if it is in credit. This Federal
Reserve line is maintained in the ‘Reporting Lines Maintenance’ screen.
Dr Head Office Line
Specify the Debit Head Office GL to which the account will report, if they are in a debit
Cr Head Office Line
Specify the Credit Head Office GL to which this account will report, if it is running in credit
3.2.5 Specifying Restriction Details
You can specify restrictions for the account, using the ‘Products and Transaction Codes
Restriction’ screen. To invoke this screen, click the ‘Restriction’ button in the ‘Customer Accounts
Maintenance’ screen.
3-51
For more details on specifying restriction details, refer ‘Maintaining Transaction Restrictions for
Account Class’ chapter in ‘Maintaining Mandatory Information’ user manual.
3.2.5.1 Specifying Product Restriction
Special Condition
By default, the restrictions maintained at the account class level will be displayed here. When you
define transaction code or product restriction attributes for an account itself, rather than for the
account class to which it belongs, it is referred to as a Special Condition. You can apply special
conditions by selecting the option ‘Special Condition Applicable’ at the account level. If you opt to
define special conditions for an account the ‘restrictions’ defined for the Account Class, to which
the account belongs, will NOT apply to this account. If you wish to continue with the account class
restrictions, opt for ‘Special Condition Not Applicable’.
Restriction Type
Specify the restriction type here. The options available are:
•
Allowed – If you select this, the products entered in the multi entry block will be
allowed for that customer account
•
Disallowed – If you select this option, the products entered in the multi entry block will
be disallowed
3-52
Product Code
You can select the products and specify the type of transaction (Dr, Cr or both) that you would
like to allow/disallow for each product. In contracts involving the selected products, the accounts
would be used for processing the selected type of transaction. For instance, assume that for the
account A1, you have allowed ‘Dr’ for the product ABCD. This would mean that if a Dr entry for
the product ABCD is passed to the account, A1, it would go through but in case a Cr entry is
passed for this product, then the system will display a message indicating that the transaction is
restricted for the account.
Description
The system displays the description for the product code that which you have specified
Dr
During transaction processing, the system will validate whether any restrictions are placed on the
account based on either product and/or transaction code. If you have indicated to allow Dr
Transactions for the product ABCD, and attempt to post a credit entry, the system will seek an
override. You can continue the transaction, despite the restrictions, by providing appropriate
reasons for the same.
During maintenance or online operations, in the respective contract screens for the restricted
transactions, when you specify the customer account, the system checks whether the account is
restricted for the product that has been selected, or the debit/credit transaction type. If so, an
override is sought when such contracts are saved.
Cr
During transaction processing, the system will validate whether any restrictions are placed on the
account based on either product and/or transaction code. If you have indicated to allow Dr
transactions for the product ABCD, and attempt to post a credit entry, the system will seek an
override. You can continue the transaction, despite the restrictions, by providing appropriate
reasons for the same.
During maintenance or online operations, in the respective contract screens for the restricted
transactions, when you specify the customer account, the system checks whether the account is
restricted for the product that has been selected, or the debit/credit transaction type. If so, an
override is sought when such contracts are saved.
3.2.5.2 Specifying Transaction Restriction
Special Condition
By default, the restrictions maintained at the account class level will be displayed here. When you
define transaction code or product restriction attributes for an account itself, rather than for the
account class to which it belongs, it is referred to as a Special Condition. You can apply special
conditions by selecting the option ‘Special Condition Applicable’ at the account level. If you opt to
define special conditions for an account the ‘restrictions’ defined for the Account Class, to which
the account belongs, will NOT apply to this account. If you wish to continue with the account class
restrictions, opt for ‘Special Condition Not Applicable’.
3-53
Restriction Type
Specify the restriction type here. The options available are:
•
Allowed – If you select this, the products entered in the multi entry block will be
allowed for that customer account
•
Disallowed – If you select this option, the products entered in the multi entry block will
be disallowed
Transaction Code
Likewise, you can maintain restrictions for transaction codes as well
Description
The system displays the description for the transaction code that you have specified
Dr
During transaction processing, the system will validate whether any restrictions are placed on the
account based on either product and/or transaction code. If you have indicated to allow debit
transactions for the product ABCD, and attempt to post a credit entry, the system will seek an
override. You can continue the transaction, despite the restrictions, by providing appropriate
reasons for the same.
During maintenance or online operations, in the respective contract screens for the restricted
transactions, when you specify the customer account, the system checks whether the account is
restricted for the product that has been selected, or the debit/credit transaction type. If so, an
override is sought when such contracts are saved.
Cr
During transaction processing, the system will validate whether any restrictions are placed on the
account based on either product and/or transaction code. If you have indicated to allow debit
transactions for the product ABCD, and attempt to post a credit entry, the system will seek an
override. You can continue the transaction, despite the restrictions, by providing appropriate
reasons for the same.
During maintenance or online operations, in the respective contract screens for the restricted
transactions, when you specify the customer account, the system checks whether the account is
restricted for the product that has been selected, or the debit/credit transaction type. If so, an
override is sought when such contracts are saved.
3.2.6 Specifying Currency Limits Details
You can specify restrictions for the account, using the ‘Currency Limits Details’ screen. To invoke
this screen, click the ‘Currency Limits’ button in the ‘Customer Accounts Maintenance’ screen.
3-54
Account Number
The system displays the customer account for which PC limits are being maintained
Currency
Specify the currency in which the auto exchange limits should be maintained. The adjoining
option list displays the currency codes maintained in the system. You can choose the appropriate
one.
Cr Lmt Amt
Specify the credit limit amount in the chosen currency.
Dr Lmt Amt
Specify the debit limit amount in the chosen currency.
3.2.7 Specifying MIS Details
You can capture Management Information System details for the account, using the
‘Management Information System’ screen. To invoke this screen; click the ‘MIS’ button in the
‘Customer Accounts Maintenance’ screen.
3-55
Branch
The current logged-in branch code is displayed here
MIS Group
For an account, the transaction type of MIS class will be picked up from the account class
Rate Code
Specify the rate code. Select the appropriate one from the adjoining option list, which displays all
valid rate codes maintained in the system
Link to Group
If an MIS Group is linked, you can indicate whether the linkage with the group should always be
maintained. If yes, any change to the MIS Group will automatically apply to the customer to whom
the MIS Group is linked. If not, the entities defaulted for the customer will continue, even if they
are changed subsequently for the group.
Rate type
If you have indicated that rates maintained for the individual account should be picked up for MIS
refinancing you have to specify the Rate Type that is to be used. The options available are:
•
Fixed
3-56
•
Floating – Automatic – indicating that the system should pick up the refinancing rate
associated with the account. Since the account number is linked to a Rate Code the
system picks up the rate code associated with the account when the EOD processes
are run to refresh the various rates.
Select the appropriate.
Pool Code/Account Level
The Pool Code/Account Level to which the account class or product belongs should be defined.
Pool Code
For an account, the pool code will be picked up from the account class.
Transaction MIS Group
For an account, the transaction type of MIS class will be picked up from the account class.
Composite MIS Group
The composite type of MIS class will be defaulted from those defined for the customer.
Cost Code
For an account, the cost codes will be picked up from the account class.
3.2.8 Viewing OFAC Check Response
OFAC check enables the application to call an external web service to perform black list check for
customer and customer accounts and give warnings appropriately while transacting with black
listed customers. You can also capture your remarks before overriding the black list warning.
Click ‘OFAC Check’ button in ‘Customer Accounts Maintenance’ screen to view the OFAC check
response in the ‘External System Detail’ screen On clicking ’OFAC Check’ button, system will
build the request XML and call the web service. The ‘External System details’ screen displays the
response is received from the external system and you will be also allowed to enter your remarks
in this screen. The response received will also be sent to Oracle FLEXCUBE Database layer for
any further interpretations of the same.
3-57
Here, you can view /capture the following details:
External System Response
The response from the external system regarding the black listed customer is displayed here.
User Remarks
Specify your remarks regarding the black listed customer here.
Note the following:
•
OFAC check is mandatory.Before saving the Customer Account, system will check if
OFAC check has been invoked. If OFAC is not checked, system will raise an alert
message to view the OFAC check details.
•
You can extract the outgoing file of customer and customer accounts details from the
‘Interface Trigger’ screen.
3-58
3.2.8.1 Specifying Change log Details
Branch
The current logged-in branch code is displayed here
3.2.8.2 Specifying Transfer log details
Here you can capture the following details:
Account Number
This is the account number of the deposit. If you specify an account that is disallowed for your
user id and move to the next field the system will throw up an error/override. The restricted
accounts for users ids are maintained in the ‘User Account Class Restrictions’ screen. The
system will perform this validation for default settlement pick up also.
3-59
3.2.9 Specifying Statement Details
You can specify restrictions for the account, using the ‘Statement Details’ screen. To invoke this
screen, click the ‘Statement’ button in the ‘Customer Accounts Maintenance’ screen.
Account Number
The system displays the account number for which you are setting the statement details
Primary A/c Statement
This refers to the type of statement to be generated periodically by the system, for this account.
You can specify whether you want a detailed or summary statement or if you do not want a
statement for this account at all.
Cycle
You can specify the frequency for generating the account statements. To specify the frequency of
the statements, click on the adjoining drop-down list. The following list is displayed:
•
Annual
•
Semi-annual
3-60
•
Quarterly
•
Monthly
•
Fortnightly
•
Weekly
•
Daily
On
For a weekly statement you specify the day of the week on which account statements should be
generated and for fortnightly and monthly statements the dates of the month. To specify for
weekly statements, click on the adjoining drop-down list. The following list of days will be
displayed:
•
Monday
•
Tuesday
•
Wednesday
•
Thursday
•
Friday
•
Saturday
•
Sunday
To specify for monthly statements enter a number between 1 and 31 (corresponding to the
system date)
If you set the statement date to 30, then account statements will be generated on:
•
The last working day for months with < 30 days
•
For months with 30 days on the 30th; if 30th is a holiday on the next working day
If you set the statement date to 31, then account statements will be generated on:
•
The 31st for month with 31 days; if 31st is a holiday on the next working day
•
The last working day for months < 31 days
For a fortnightly statement you could specify 1 and 15
For all other cycles, account statement will be generated on the last day of that cycle
Interim Statement Details
Generate Interim Statement
Check this box if you want to generate the interim statement.
3-61
Previous Statement Date
The system displays the date on which the statement was last generated.
Balance
The system displays the interim balance in the account.
The message tag ‘INTRST_DETAILED’ is used for interim statement.
Statement Cycle upon Account Opening
The first time statement generation for an account after account opening depends on the first
statement block days specified in the Account Class Maintenance screen.
Statement Start Date
Specify the date for generating the statement for the first time. It should not be less than the
account opening date.
The first statement generation date will be derived and displayed in Statement start date, based
on the block days captured and cycle days mentioned in the statement details. However you are
allowed to modify the displayed statement start date at account level.
This maintenance is done also at secondary, and territory level of account statement to
generate the statement for the first time.
Example: 1
Customer ID: 12345678
Name: Mr. XYZ
First Statement block days: 10
Statement Cycle: Monthly
Statement Cycle Day: 3rd of every month
Account Opening Date: 25th Jul 2010
Scheduled Statement Generation Date: 3rd Aug 2010
In the above example, the 1st Statement Generation date should be 3rd Sep 2010, instead of 3rd Aug 2010
as it falls within the first 10 days of account opening date
Check the 1st Statement generation date for above example the 1st Statement generation date should be
3rd Sep 2010
Example: 2
Customer ID: 12345678
3-62
Name: Mr. XYZ
First Statement block days: 10
Statement Cycle: Daily
Account Opening Date: 25th Jul 2010
Scheduled Statement Generation Date: 26th July 2010
In the above example, the 1st Statement Generation date should be 4th Aug 2010, instead of 26th July
2010 as it falls within the first 10 days of account opening date
Example: 3
Customer ID: 12345678
Name: Mr. XYZ
First Statement block days: 10
Statement Cycle: Weekly
Statement Cycle On: Thursday
Account Opening Date: 25th Jul 2010
Scheduled Statement Generation Date: 29th July 2010
In the above example, the 1st Statement Generation date should be 5th Aug 2010, instead of 29th July 2010
as it falls within the first 10 days of account opening date
Example: 4
Customer ID: 12345678
Name: Mr. XYZ
First Statement block days: 10
Statement Cycle: Quarterly
Statement Cycle On: August
Account Opening Date: 25th Jul 2010
Scheduled Statement Generation Date: 31st Aug 2010
In the above example, the 1st Statement Generation date should be 31st Aug 2010, as it falls after the First
Cycle block days
Example: 5
Customer ID: 12345678
Name: Mr. XYZ
3-63
First Statement block days: 10
Statement Cycle: Semi annually
Statement Cycle On: July
Account Opening Date: 25th Jul 2010
Scheduled Statement Generation Date: 31st July Aug 2010
In the above example, the 1st Statement Generation date should be 31st Jan 2011, as scheduled statement
date falls within First Statement block days
Example: 6
Customer ID: 12345678
Name: Mr. XYZ
First Statement block days: 10
Statement Cycle: Annually
Statement Cycle On: August
Account Opening Date: 25th Jul 2010
Scheduled Statement Generation Date: 31st Aug 2010
In the above example, the 1st Statement Generation date should be 31st Aug 2010, as it falls after the First
Cycle block days
Note the following:
•
If the date arrived at by adding the first statement block days to the account opening
date is less than the statement cycle date, then the default value of the settlement
start date will be first statement cycle date.
•
If the date arrived at by adding the first statement block days to the account opening
date is greater than the statement cycle date, then the default value of the settlement
start date will be next statement cycle date.
Generate Stat. Only On Movement
You can indicate that an account statement should be generated for the customer’s account only
when there has been a movement of funds into the account or when funds have been transferred
out of the account.
For instance, let us assume that on the August 21, 2001, you have set the account statement
generation frequency as Daily for the account LI020804. On the September 5, 2001, there has
been no movement of funds in the particular account. If you have opted for the Generate Only on
Movement option, the system will not generate a statement message for September 5, 2001.
3-64
If you choose not to enable this option, account statements will be generated regardless of
whether there has been a movement of funds or not.
Display IBAN in Advices
If you would like to print the IBAN number of the customer on advices sent to the customer, you
can enable the Display IBAN in Advices option by checking it. This specification will be defaulted
from the account class linked to the customer account. You will be allowed to change it for a
specific account.
You can choose to print the IBAN Number in advices that are sent to the customer by enabling
the check box positioned next to the Display IBAN on Advices field. If the Display IBAN on
Advices check box is disabled, you can enable this option by checking the box. Consequently, the
IBAN Account Number will be printed on all customer correspondence (Debit/Credit advices)
involving the particular account.
Because of choosing to print IBAN numbers in the correspondence sent to the customer, the
Oracle FLEXCUBE account number will be replaced by the IBAN number. The lists of SWIFT
messages that will include IBAN account numbers are as follows:
•
MT940 – Customer Statement Message
•
MT950 – Statement Message
•
MT900 – Confirmation of debit
•
MT910 – Confirmation of Credit
While processing incoming payments, the system checks to see whether the account
involved is an IBAN account. If the account is an IBAN account, it will be processed with the
corresponding Oracle FLEXCUBE account number.
Secondary A/c Statement
This refers to the type of statement to be generated periodically by the system, for this account.
You can specify whether you want a detailed or summary statement or if you do not want a
statement for this account at all.
Cycle
You can specify the frequency for generating the account statements. To specify the frequency of
the statements, click on the adjoining drop-down list. The following list is displayed:
•
Annual
•
Semi-annual
•
Quarterly
•
Monthly
•
Fortnightly
•
Weekly
3-65
•
Daily
On
For a weekly statement you specify the day of the week on which account statements should be
generated and for fortnightly and monthly statements the dates of the month. To specify for
weekly statements, click on the adjoining drop-down list. The following list of days will be
displayed:
•
Monday
•
Tuesday
•
Wednesday
•
Thursday
•
Friday
•
Saturday
•
Sunday
To specify for monthly statements enter a number between 1 and 31 (corresponding to the
system date).
If you set the statement date to 30, then account statements will be generated on:
•
The last working day for months with < 30 days
•
For months with 30 days on the 30th; if 30th is a holiday on the next working day
If you set the statement date to 31, then account statements will be generated on:
•
The 31st for month with 31 days; if 31st is a holiday on the next working day
•
The last working day for months < 31 days
For a fortnightly statement, you could specify 1 and 15
For all other cycles, account statement will be generated on the last day of that cycle
Statement Start Date
For details refer the ‘Statement Cycle upon Account Opening’ section in this user manual.
Generate Stat. Only On Movement
You can indicate that an account statement should be generated for the customer’s account only
when there has been a movement of funds into the account or when funds have been transferred
out of the account.
3-66
For instance, let us assume that on the August 21, 2001, you have set the account statement
generation frequency as Daily for the account LI020804. On September 5, 2001, there has been
no movement of funds in the particular account. If you have opted for the Generate Only on
Movement option, the system will not generate a statement message for September 5, 2001.
If you choose not to enable this option, account statements will be generated regardless of
whether there has been a movement of funds or not.
Tertiary A/c Statement
This refers to the type of statement to be generated periodically by the system, for this account.
You can specify whether you want a detailed or summary statement or if you do not want a
statement for this account at all.
Cycle
You can specify the frequency for generating the account statements. To specify the frequency of
the statements, click on the adjoining drop-down list. The following list is displayed:
•
Annual
•
Semi-annual
•
Quarterly
•
Monthly
•
Fortnightly
•
Weekly
•
Daily
On
For a weekly statement you specify the day of the week on which account statements should be
generated and for fortnightly and monthly statements the dates of the month. To specify for
weekly statements, click on the adjoining drop-down list. The following list of days will be
displayed:
•
Monday
•
Tuesday
•
Wednesday
•
Thursday
•
Friday
•
Saturday
•
Sunday
To specify for monthly statements enter a number between 1 and 31 (corresponding to the
system date).
3-67
If you set the statement date to 30, then account statements will be generated on:
•
The last working day for months with < 30 days
•
For months with 30 days on the 30th; if 30th is a holiday on the next working day
If you set the statement date to 31, then account statements will be generated on:
•
The 31st for month with 31 days; if 31st is a holiday on the next working day
•
The last working day for months < 31 days
For a fortnightly statement, you could specify 1 and 15
For all other cycles, account statement will be generated on the last day of that cycle
Statement Start Date
For details refer the ‘Statement Cycle upon Account Opening’ section in this user manual.
Generate Stat. Only On Movement
You can indicate that an account statement should be generated for the customer’s account only
when there has been a movement of funds into the account or when funds have been transferred
out of the account.
For instance, let us assume that on the August 21, 2001, you have set the account statement
generation frequency as Daily for the account LI020804. On September 5, 2001, there has been
no movement of funds in the particular account. If you have opted for the Generate Only on
Movement option the system will not generate a statement message for September 5, 2001.
If you choose not to enable this option, account statements will be generated regardless of
whether there has been a movement of funds or not.
Exclude Same Day Reversal trns from Stmt
If you do not wish transactions booked and reversed on the same day to be reflected in the
account statement, you can specify the preference here. This feature is applicable only for the
customer account legs and not for the related GL legs. Also, reversals made through the DE
module will not be considered for exclusion.
This specification is defaulted from the account class linked to the account. You can change it for
a specific account.
Statement Account
A customer may have two or more accounts with your bank but may desire to receive a single
consolidated account statement.
Oracle FLEXCUBE allows you to link accounts. For the particular account whose statement
preferences you are defining you can indicate the parent account to which the account should be
linked for statement generation purposes.
3-68
The statement account is applicable for all type of account statements (Primary, Secondary and
Tertiary). If the statement account has been specified, you cannot enter other statement details.
If the statement account is not specified for a particular account then the account can be a
statement account for other accounts. If statement accounts have been maintained, during EOD,
the account statement will not be individually generated for the child accounts. Instead a
consolidated account statement would be generated based on the frequency specified for the
parent account.
While closing a parent account, a message will be shown requesting removal of the parent-child
account linkage.
Even while generating ad-hoc statements you can indicate whether linked account details
should be displayed in the generated report.
To view the details of loan instalment recovery and charge recovery details in the Account
Statement Report following tags will be included:
•
_LNCHGDTLS_
•
_CLCHGACC_
Statement Charge Code
The customer is charged for the combined statement based on the charge slab maintained in the
IC product.
The Charge Basis ‘STMT_CHG_CODE’ is provided in the IC module to charge the customer for
combined statement. The SDE ‘STMT_CHG_CODE’ is not used for Charge Calculation.
3.2.9.1 Account Statement for Closed Accounts
Oracle Flexcube allows you to select closed accounts also for the generation of account
statements based on the statement parameters set at account level in addition to the Open or
active accounts during EOD.
The system generates the account statement though the account is closed, provided the
immediate statement after account closure has not been generated
The system will not generate the account statement, if the account is closed and the immediate
account statement after closure has been generated.
Account statement for a closed account is generated in the generation cycle immediately
following its closure, but not later.
3-69
3.2.9.2 Processing a Customer Account Statement - Description of Overdue Recovered
A new data store will be introduced to track the details of loan installment recovery and charge
recovery details which will be populated as soon as any overdue loan installment or any overdue
charge recovery has happened.
Following details will be captured in the new data store:
•
Account no against which the recovery was done
•
The transaction reference number
•
The total amount that was recovered
•
Dr/Cr indicator
•
The date of recovery
•
The original due date
•
The description of the recovery with original due Month and year.
On generating the statement, the system will look into above data store and all those recoveries
that have happened between the last statement generated date and the current statement date
and the details will be shown on the account statement.
3-70
3.2.10 Specifying Account Limits
You can capture details of account limits, using the ‘Account Limits’ screen. Click the ‘Limits’
button in the ‘Customer Accounts Maintenance’ screen to invoke this screen.
Temp. OD Start
The start and end dates represent the dates from which the temporary overdraft limit becomes
effective upto the date on which it should ceases to be effective.
Temp. OD Start
The start and end dates represent the dates from which the temporary overdraft limit becomes
effective upto the date on which it should ceases to be effective.
Credit Line
You can indicate the credit line to which you would like to link the customer to. A list of all the
credit line codes maintained in the system will be displayed in the option list. You can select the
appropriate.
Netting Required
To process linked accounts, which are marked for referral, you will need to enable the Netting
Required option. This option is defaulted from the Credit Line associated with the customer
account. If you change the default option, the system displays an override message.
Temp. OD Limit
The temporary OD limit is the limit upto, which any overdraft is allowed, for a specified time
period, over and above the limit set for this account.
3-71
This limit is independent of any credit line linked to this account. This is mostly used for short term
overdrawing.
Sublimit
The sub-limit represents that portion of the total credit amount that can be used by this customer
account. The sub-limit need be input only when the account is to be limited to a portion of the
available line amount.
While passing transactions to an account with a sub-limit the first credit check made is against
this sub-limit amount. If the sub-limit is crossed, you will be asked for an override.
Uncoll. Funds Limit
The uncollected funds limit represents the credit transaction amounts that have not been
collected as of the current day. You can set the limit upto which withdrawal is allowed against
uncollected funds.
The uncollected opening balance is reset with the current uncollected balance amount during the
EOD process. This amount is to be considered when calculating Central Limit availability.
Offline Limit
This is the limiting amount till which transactions will be carried out between account(s) for the
account class you are defining here, between branches when the database connectivity is not
functional.
Daylight Limit
The daylight limit is the limit up to which an overdraft is allowed for the business day. The daylight
limit will be added to temporary overdraft to calculate the available balance if EOD is not in
progress. Daylight limit is not considered during EOD.
You can specify the daylight limit only if ‘Daylight Limit’ option is checked in linked ‘Account
Class - Preferences’ screen. By default, the system will display the value as zero. You can
however change it.
SOD Notification %
Specify the consolidated percentage utilization used for notification of the limit breach under the
SOD (secure overdraft).
For more information on SOD Alert Generation, refer topic ‘Generating Alert for SOD Utilization’
later in this chapter.
Cr Transaction Limit
The limit for credit transactions in the account currency. When a transaction exceeds this limit, an
override is displayed. The override requires a dual authorization to save the transaction.
3-72
Credit Start Date
This is the date from which this monitoring comes into effect. The check will be performed for all
entries to customer accounts with transaction (booking) date greater than or equal to the start
date.
Credit Rev Date
This is the date on which you would wish to revise this limit. The limit check will continue
irrespective of the date maintained here. The revision date must be greater than the start date
and can be left blank.
3.2.10.1
Specifying TOD Renewal Details
Renew TOD
Check this box if you want to renew TOD.
Renew Frequency
Specify the renew frequency from the drop-down list. The available options are:
•
Days
•
Months
•
Years
Renew Units
Specify the renew units.
The following validations need to be done for the frequency:
•
If ‘Renew Frequency’ chosen is ‘Days’ then ‘Renew Units’ cannot be greater than 366
•
If ‘Renew Frequency’ chosen is ‘Months’ then ‘Renew Units’ cannot be greater than
12
•
If ‘Renew Frequency’ chosen is ‘Years’ then ‘Renew Units’ can be given in terms of
years
Next Renewal Limit
Specify the TOD amount that can be renewed in next cycle.
3-73
3.2.11 Specifying Joint Holder Details
You can capture details of joint holders of the account, using the ‘Linked Entities’ screen. Click
the ‘Joint Holders’ button in the ‘Customer Accounts Maintenance’ screen to invoke this screen.
Branch
The system displays the branch code of the current branch
Account Number
The system displays the account number here
Joint Holder Code
This field specifies the code numbers assigned to each of the joint holders of this account
Description
This is the description of the joint holder. Here you can enter the name of the joint holder and also
his relationship with this customer
Joint Holder Type
Specify the type of authority. Select the appropriate one from the drop-down menu. The options
are:
•
Authorized Signatory
•
Customer Contact Person
•
Guardian
•
Custodian
3-74
•
Developer
•
Guarantor
•
Joint and First
•
Joint and Other
•
Joint or First
•
Joint or Other
•
Beneficiary
•
Related for Inquiry
•
Solicitor
•
Sole Owner
•
Third Party
•
Trustee
•
Valuer
•
Power of Attorney
Start Date and End Date
The Start Date and End Date display the validity of the joint holder of the account. This is for
information purpose only.
Mailing Label
Check this box to enable the customer to receive respective account correspondences via mail.
3.2.12 Specifying UDF Details
You can capture User Defined Fields for the account, using the ‘UDF’ screen. To invoke this
screen; click the ‘Fields’ button in the ‘Customer Accounts Maintenance’ screen.'
3-75
3.2.13 Specifying Deposits Instructions
Oracle FLEXCUBE allows you to create auto deposits from a savings account if the balance in
the account exceeds a certain limit. You can capture details for creation of auto deposits, using
the ‘Deposits Instruction’ screen. To invoke this screen, click the ‘Deposits Instruction’ button in
the ‘Customer Accounts Maintenance’ screen.
Here you can capture the following details:
•
Account Number - Specify the account number of the customer. Select the account
number from the adjoining option list
•
Account Class - This is the account class to which the account is linked
•
Customer - The customer for whom you are maintaining the deposit instructions
•
Sweep Branch - Indicate the branch to which the sweep is carried out
•
Sweep To Account - Indicate the account to which the sweep is carried out
•
Amount - This is the deposit amount
•
Minimum Required Balance - The minimum balance indicates that only the amounts
above this limit will be used for auto creating deposits
•
Source Code - The code assigned for the sweep
•
External Reference Number
•
Branch - The branch code of the branch which is to be associated with the account
•
Sequence Number - The system generated sequence number for the instruction you
are maintaining
•
Currency - Currency of the particular account
•
Deposit Currency - The currency in which the deposit is made
3-76
•
Tenor - Tenor for the deposits that are opened under an account class
•
Sweep Multiple Of - The sweep can only be in multiples of the sweep specified
•
Retry Till Date - The instructions specified will be invalid after this date Any failed
sweeps after this date will not be picked up for processing the next day
3.2.14 Specifying Billing Parameters
You can capture billing parameters for the account, using the ‘Billing Parameters’ screen. To
invoke this screen; click the ‘Billing Parameters’ button in the ‘Customer Accounts Maintenance’
screen.
You will have to maintain a set of parameters for the billing module. While settling or liquidating
the bill, the default parameters that you have maintained for the account involved in this module
will be used.
The screen also displays the Product Code and Description of all Billing Products applicable to
the account.
Consolidating Account
You can specify a consolidating account for the given account. From the option list you can
choose:
3-77
•
A different account number if you want to consolidate the charge under this account
to a different account. The Consolidation account selected for this account should be
in the same currency as this account. It also has to belong to the same branch as the
specified account.
•
The same account to indicate that there is no consolidation and an individual billing
invoice is to be raised on this account
Billing Liquidation
You have two modes of liquidation i.e. Auto or Manual. The preference you have maintained for
the billing product will be defaulted here. You can choose to change the mode for the specified
account under the following scenarios:
•
If Auto is chosen, then you have to specify whether the settlement is through a
settlement account or through Direct Debit Instruction
•
In case you want to raise Direct Debit instruction for the billing invoice amount,
irrespective of whether the liquidation mode is Auto or Manual, you have to maintain
the details for Direct Debit details viz. Direct Debit Bank Code, Account, Name and
Agreement ID fields.
•
If you choose Manual option, then manual liquidation is possible only under the
following four modes:
¾
By Cash – through retail teller product
¾
By Clearing – through outward clearing product
¾
By Transfer – debit account in CASA module
¾
By Direct Debit – through PC module
If the consolidation account is different from the present account, then the system uses the
liquidation parameters specified at the consolidation account level and liquidation parameters
specified, if any, at this account level is ignored.
Settlement Account
As mentioned above, you need to specify the settlement account to enable automatic liquidation
of billing.
For liquidating the billing amount and also for collecting the bill amount, the system makes use of
the account specified here.
Maintaining direct debit details
If you have maintained the mode of settlement for auto liquidation of bills as Direct Debit
instructions, you need to specify the following details:
•
Bank Code – Choose the bank code from the option list. This indicates the bank code
of the settlement account
•
Account Number – Specify the account number for the settlement account
•
Name – Specify the name of the debtor
3-78
•
Agreement ID – Specify the agreement id on which the DD is to be generated
During liquidation, the direct debit contract is uploaded into the system in case you have
maintained the settlement mode as direct debit transaction. The upload happens for both
automatic liquidation and manual liquidation.
3.2.14.1
Closure of accounts with outstanding Billing Invoices
In the event of account closure, the system allows closure only after all invoice are generated and
payment of outstanding bill amount is made.
Before closing the account, you need to:
•
Manually liquidate the billing amount through the Manual Liquidation screen in case
the payment is yet to be done. The system displays a message for the unpaid
amount.
•
Generate the pending invoices for all Billing Products applicable to that account,
using the Account Based Invoice Generation screen, and also liquidate the bill
amounts under each of the Billing Products manually.
•
Refund the amount if the overdue amount is in negative
3.2.15 Initiating manual liquidation for bills
All the components of a bill can be liquidated automatically or manually. In the Product
Preferences screen, you can indicate whether the mode of liquidation of bills is to be automatic or
manual. The system automatically liquidates those bills marked for auto liquidation. If the bills are
marked for manual liquidation, you have to liquidate them through the Billing Liquidation screen.
The liquidation is triggered differently for each of the following scenarios:
•
Account Based
•
Adhoc Based
•
Batch Based
Refer the section ‘Defining parameters for settlement/liquidation of bill for an account’ in Billing
User Manual under Modularity for details about this screen.
3-79
3.2.16 Specifying Account Signatory Details
You can capture details of signatories for the account, using the ‘Signatory Details’ screen. To
invoke this screen, click the ‘Account Signatory’ button in the ‘Customer Accounts Maintenance’
screen.
Here you can capture the following details:
Branch
The system defaults the current branch here
Account Number
This is the account number to which signatories are to being linked
Account Description
The system displays the description for the account you have selected
Customer Number
Enter the customer signatory you want to link to the account
You can link a customer signatory to an account either by:
•
Click on the option list next to the Signatory Number. A list of customer signatory
numbers, whose details have been captured will be displayed, along with their
names. Pick up the signatory whom you want to make an account signatory for the
account
3-80
•
Keying-in the customer Signatory Number and Name directly, if the signatory number
has not been maintained through the Customer Signatory details screen
If the signatory ID that you specify has not been maintained, the System displays an
override. On confirming the override, you will be allowed to save the signatory details. An error
message is displayed if you enter a duplicate Signatory ID. Each time you capture a new
Signatory ID at the account level you must identify the relationship of the signatory with the
customer.
Customer Name
The system displays the name of the corresponding customer
Minimum Number of Signatories
Specify the minimum number of signatories necessary to endorse an instrument involving the
account
Account Message
You can capture information about particular signatories. These messages could pertain to the
name, number and the type of signatory your customer is. For instance you can capture a
message like - "This signatory is a joint account holder with rights to sign instruments only up US
8000".
Signatory Number
The system displays values maintained in CIF signatory for the customer number
Signatory Name
The system displays the corresponding name of the signatory number specified
Approval Limit
Specify the amount up to which the account signatory can approve for debits
3.2.17 Specifying Details for Balance Report Statement
The Customer accounts maintenance provides you with the facility to generate balance reports
for the customer account. These details are defaulted from the account class maintenance
performed for the account class category the customer account comes under. You can however,
alter these details utilizing the Customer account maintenance screen.
3-81
To invoke this screen click the ‘Interim Transactions Report’ button, in the customer account
maintenance screen. You need to specify the details for an MT 941 message.
This screen contains the details necessary for the account generation parameters. The message
details the balance of the customer account that is under a particular account class. The account
balances indicate the condition of the customer account for an identified time period.
3.2.17.1
Specifying Interim Transactions Report
Generate Message
Check this box to indicate that the periodic interim statement (MT942) generation is required for
the account. This will be defaulted from ‘Account Class Maintenance’ screen. However, you can
modify it. The ‘Consolidated Statement’ and ‘Generate Message’ are mutually restricted.
Generate Message Only on Movement
Check this box to indicate that the interim statement generation is required, only if additional
entries have been posted subsequent to the previous interim statement generation. This will be
defaulted from ‘Account Class’ screen, however you can modify it.
Report Transaction Since
This section lists all the transactions of the interim account statement, which are supposed to be
reported. This will be defaulted from ‘Account Class’ screen, however you can modify it. You can
choose the appropriate values applicable:
•
Previous MT942 – This indicates that all transactions posted and authorized since
previous MT942 would be sent in the current interim statement.
•
Previous MT940: This indicates that all transactions posted and authorized since
previous MT940 will be sent in the current interim statement. If this option is selected,
you will have to specify the cycle of account statement to be considered.
3-82
Minimum Debit Amount
Specify the minimum transaction amount for the debit transaction to be eligible for reporting in the
interim statement. The corresponding amount for the account currency will be defaulted.
However, you can modify the amount defaulted. If the amounts are not defined at the account
class for the currency in which the account is being created, no defaulting of amounts shall be
done.
Minimum Credit Amount
Specify the minimum transaction amount for the credit transaction to be eligible for reporting in
the interim statement. However, you can modify the amount defaulted. If the amounts are not
defined at the account class for the currency in which the account is being created, no defaulting
of amounts shall be done.
Daily Statement Count
Specify the count of interim statement generated during the day. In case a statement is
scheduled to generate, but is not generated because there is no movement, the counter will not
be incremented. The counter will be reset at End of Day.
Year to Date Statement Count
Specify the count of interim statement generated for the account since start of the financial year.
The financial year will be as defined in the Accounting Period maintenance. This counter would
be set at the end of year.
Generate Balance Report
To indicate that the customer account is considered for generation of its balance message, check
this box
Of
Select the mode of message for balance generation from the option list
Report Transaction Since
This section lists all the transactions the customer account has undergone, in the interval of
balance messages generated for the account. You can choose the appropriate values
applicable:
•
Previous MT940: This indicates all transactions posted and authorized since the
issue of a previous MT 940 in the current balance report
•
Previous MT941: This indicates all transactions posted and authorized since the
issue of a previous MT 941 in the current balance report
•
Previous MT950: This indicates all transactions posted and authorized since the
issue of a previous MT 950 in the current balance report
3-83
You can synchronize the time instance by hours for generation of the balance message by
clicking the ‘Times’ button.
This screen is employed to indicate the the time instance in hours for the generation of the
balance report.
Message generation time
Specify the timing for generation of the MT 941/ MT942 message. You can specify the time
interval in hours only.
The details for issuing the balance reports are discussed in the chapter ‘Maintaining Mandatory
information, for different accounts under a particular class. The details involved in generation of a
balance report for a specific customer account correspond with those discussed for account
classes.
3.3
Maintaining Account Statement Charge Codes
You may wish to charge your customer for generation of account statements especially if they
have additional features such as:
•
Documents/Deposit slips related to the transactions
•
Images of checks
•
Combined Account statements
For this you can maintain various charge values, along with their corresponding codes, in the
‘Statement Charge Code Maintenance’ screen.
You can invoke the ‘Statement Charge Code Maintenance’ screen by typing ‘CSDZSTOP’ in the
field at the top right corner of the Application Toolbar and then clicking the adjoining arrow button.
3-84
You can specify the following details in the above screen:
Statement Charge Code
Specify a unique code to identify the charge value being maintained.
Statement Charge value
Specify a flat amount which is to be levied from the customer as charges for providing the
account statement.
The customer is charged for the combined statement based on the charge slab maintained in
the IC product. The SDE ‘STMT_CHG_CODE’ is provided in the IC module to charge the
customer for combined statement. The SDE ‘STMT_CHG_CODE’ is not used for Charge
Calculation.
3.4
Generating a Combined Account Statement
Account statements of multiple accounts of a customer can be combined and generated as a
single statement. Such Combined Account Statements can include either all accounts or all the
accounts of a customer.
For any customer, you can specify whether a Combined Account Statement is required or not. If
opted for, then you may also specify the following:
•
Frequency of combined statement generation
•
Accounts to be included in the single combined statement. Statements of excluded
accounts will be generated separately and independently.
•
Monthly fee for Combined Account Statements
3-85
Combined Account Statements, if opted for, will consist of multiple statements listed in the order
of their account opening dates. However you may change this order by specifying an account as
'Primary Account'. The combined statement will then have the primary account listed first.
Accounts selected for a Combined Account Statement should have the same Statement
Preferences relating to production of documents/images of checks/deposit slips.
3.4.1 Maintaining Combined Account Statement Parameters
All parameters required for generating combined account statements can be maintained in the
‘Combined Statement’ screen.
You can invoke the ‘Combined Statement’ screen by typing STDCMDST in the field at the top
right corner of the Application tool bar and then clicking the adjoining arrow button.
Customer Number
Here you can specify the customer for whom the parameters for combined statement generation
are being maintained. Specify the customer by selecting the customer number from the list
available here.
Reference Number
A reference number for the combined statement is automatically generated and displayed here.
Sorting Type
The statements listed in the combined statement can be listed in either of the following orders:
3-86
•
In the order of their account opening dates – To enable this click ‘Account Opening’
option.
•
In an order specified by you – To enable this click ‘User Defined’ option. You can
specify the sequence of statements using the ‘SI No’ field under ‘Account Details’.
Statement Charge
Code
Select the charge code for the combined statement from the list available here.
Statement ACST Format
Specify the account statement format to be used.
Cycle – Day and Cycle
You can specify the frequency of statement generation here.
Select against Cycle the frequency in which the combined statement is to be generated. You may
select any of the following:
•
Annual
•
Semi-Annual
•
Quarterly
•
Monthly
•
Fortnightly
•
Weekly
•
Daily
For a weekly statement specify against Day the day of the week on which the statement is to be
generated. For weekly statements, select the day from the adjoining drop-down list. The following
list of days will be displayed:
•
Monday
•
Tuesday
•
Wednesday
•
Thursday
•
Friday
•
Saturday
•
Sunday
3-87
For a fortnightly statement, the account statement will be generated in alternate weeks on the day
of the week you have specified.
For monthly statements enter a number between 1 and 31(including both numbers) to specify the
day of the month. For monthly statements, if you set Day as 30, then the statement will be
generated on the:
•
Last working day for February
•
30th of the month
•
Next working day if 30th is a holiday
For monthly statements, if you set Day as 31, then the statement will be generated on the:
•
Last working day for months with less than 31 days
•
31st of the month
•
Next working day if 31st is a holiday
Statement Date
Enter the date of the first statement cycle here.
Generate Statement only on Movement
Select this check box if the statement needs to be generated only when there has been a
movement of funds into the account or when funds have been transferred out of the account. If
left unselected the statement will be generated as per the cycle.
Display IBAN in Advices
Select this check box to have the IBANs of the accounts displayed in the advices.
Previous Statement – Date and Number
These fields display the date on which the previous statement was generated and the reference
number of the pervious statement.
Type – Summary/Detailed
Specify whether the combined statement should be detailed or just a summary.
Exclude Same Day Reversal
Check this box to exclude the same day reversal entries in the statement cycle. This is applicable
for the detailed statement.
Account Details
Here you can list all accounts which must be included in the combined account statement. Click
add row icon to add a row here. In each row you can specify the following details:
3-88
•
Account No – Select the account number of the account to be included in the
combined account statement. The adjoining option list displays all account numbers
maintained in the system. Choose the appropriate one. This also includes the joint
accounts and CD accounts.
•
Branch Code – Select the branch code of the bank to which the account belongs to.
•
Primary Account – Select this check box so that the account must be listed first in the
combined statement.
•
Charge Account – Select this check box if the statement generation charge specified
for this account must be applied to the combined statement too.
•
SI No – If you have chosen ‘User Defined’ sorting type for the combined statement,
then specify the serial/sequence number in which this account must be listed. These
numbers are automatically generated. However you may change them.
The ‘Balance’ field shows the balance in the corresponding account.
To remove a selected account/row from this list, click delete row icon.
You can have only one primary and one charge account. Customers are charged for
combined statements.
3.5
Viewing Customer Account Details
You can query and view details of your customers through the ‘Customer Accounts Summary’
screen. To invoke this screen type ‘STSCUSAC’ in the field at the top right corner of the
Application tool bar and click the adjoining arrow button.
3-89
In this screen, specify the criteria for the query. The criteria can be any combination of the
following:
•
Authorization Status
•
Branch Code
•
Customer Number
•
Record Status
•
Account
•
Customer Name
After specifying the criteria, click ‘Search’ button. The system displays all the records that match
the criteria specified. To view a record in detail, double click on it. If you do not mention any
criteria, the system displays all the records when you click ‘Search’.
3.6
Balance Statement Handoff
The balance statement can be handed off as part of scheduled task under Oracle FLEXCUBE.
You need to assign its frequency in hours. This process is initiated for all accounts requiring a
balance account statement. As discussed previously the time for generation of the statement is
determined and specified. In case of no subsequent transactions reports, the statement is not
generated.
3-90
3.6.1 Assigning Balance Statement as Job
The balance statement can be facilitated to run as part of a scheduled job as part of the Oracle
jobs initiated during processing. The Jobs Browser screen of the application provides you the
facility to run the balance statement as a synchronized task, subject to specified time intervals in
hours.
Invoke the ‘Jobs Browser’ screen from the application typing ‘CSSJOBBR’ in the field at the top
right corner of the Application tool bar and click on the adjoining arrow button.
Select the option ‘Generate Balance Report’ from the Process option list. All associated accounts
of the particular branch that have been marked for generation of balance statements are procured
by Oracle FLEXCUBE
The debit and credit accounts considered since the previous issue of an MT941/MT942, are
picked up for the current processing. The previous messages are based on the parameters
maintained for each account. This processing produces details of the statement generation.
3.6.2 Generation of Ad hoc Reports
Balance reports for each account under an account class can be generated on an ad hoc basis.
The Ad Hoc report generation screen is used for capturing details of a balance report sent ad
hoc.
3-91
You can invoke this screen by selecting Messages in the application browser. Hereafter select
‘Detailed’ under ‘Account Balance and Interim Report’.
Alternatively, you can invoke this screen by typing ‘ACDADCRP’ in the upper right corner of the
application toolbar, and clicking the arrow adjacent it.
Branch Code
The branch to which the account marked for balance report generation belongs is displayed; you
cannot change or modify this value.
Account
Select the account, which has been identified for generation of a balance statement, from the
option list. The account balance of this account is generated as an outgoing statement.
Swift Message Type
Select the type of message required to be sent. As the message is a balance statement, select
MT941/ MT942.
Click on the ‘Generate Statement’ to initiate the generation of balance statement for the account
you have selected. This process would pick up the entire debit and credit component accounts
created since the issue of a previous MT941, MT942, MT950 or MT940 are included in the
generated statement.
3-92
You can examine the details of the generated message, to ensure that all details entered are
correct. Click on the ‘View’ button, to observe the outgoing message.
You can examine the message for ensuring the information entered is complete. You can only
view the details of the message; no input of additional information is supported at this stage.
3.6.3 Maintaining Notice Preferences for Withdrawal
You can view and modify the notice preferences maintained at the account class level for the
withdrawal of amount from savings account through the ‘Notice Preferences’ screen. Click
‘Notice’ button in the ‘Customer Accounts Maintenance’ screen. The ‘Notice Preferences’ screen
is displayed as follows:
This screen is applicable only for saving type of account
The following field is displayed in this screen:
3-93
Description
The following details are defaulted from the account class maintenance level. However, at the
account level you are allowed to modify this.
Advance Interest
Check this field to levy the advance interest on the account
Note the following:
•
The customer is liable to pay this advance interest in case he/she fails to provide the
required notice to the bank
•
The system deducts the advance interest from the credit Interest earned by the
customer on his/her credit balance in the account
Monthly Free Amount
Specify the amount that the customer can withdraw per calendar month from his/her savings
account without being liable to pay advance interest.
Notice Days
Specify the number of days before which the customer should notify the bank if he/she wants to
withdraw an amount more than the ‘Free Amount’ from his/her account.
Validity Period
Specify the validity period in number of days. During this period, the customer can do the
withdrawal of the amount for which he/she notified the bank.
For more details on ‘Notice Accounts’ refer the following section.
3-94
3.6.4 Viewing Cards Details
Click ‘Cards’ button to view details about debit cards issued against the account.
Here, you can view the following details.
Branch Code
The branch code is displayed from the main ‘Customer Accounts Maintenance’ screen.
Customer Number
The customer identification code (CIF) of the account holder is displayed from the main
‘Customer Accounts Maintenance’ screen.
Account No
The account number is displayed from the main ‘Customer Accounts Maintenance’ screen..
Authorization Status
Indicate the authorization status of the debit card by selecting one of the following values:
•
Authorized
•
Unauthorized
Record Status
Indicate the record status of the debit card by selecting one of the following values:
•
Open
•
Closed
3-95
Branch Code
The system displays the branch code where the debit card has been issued.
Request Reference Number
The system displays the request reference number of the card issuance record.
Card Number
The system displays the debit card number of the card holder.
Multiple cards can be issued to a customer.
3.6.5 Generating Alert for Secure Overdraft Utilization
Secure Overdraft (SOD) facility is given against collaterals for an account. Oracle FLEXCUBE
facilitates generation of alert when SOD utilization is closer towards the consolidated limit amount
of the collaterals.
Oracle FLEXCUBE runs a batch process to identify such breached SOD accounts and generates
alerts as per the maintained percentage parameter at SOD account level and decides the breach
limit for every account. The system sends the generated alerts as ADVICE format (email) or
ASCII flat file. It defines the message format for email and captures the following key information
to send these alerts to OD customer:
•
Email ID
•
Mobile number
The system runs a CASA batch adding the following process ‘SODALERT’:
•
Identify the SOD accounts to be processed
•
Read the percentage for breach calculation
•
Identify if the breach happened
•
Generate the alert to intermediate data store
•
Generate the MSG handoff in case the medium is mail
•
Complete the message generation if the medium is mail
•
Update the dispatch flag as processed.
3.6.5.1 Creating a Message Advice Format
You need to create a message advice format through the ‘Advice Format Maintenance’ screen
with the format named ‘SOD_CR_UTIL’. You should also create an outgoing generic interface to
generate ASCII file where in the component details for the generic interface are the elements
from the new data store. You need to schedule this generic interface to be executed during EOD
through ‘GIDPRSIF’ batch.
3-96
The system processes alerts only if the email address and mobile number are maintained for
a customer.
You can know the Limit Utilization Breach for the account by the application of the following
formula:
‘(Utilized limit amount) ≥ (SOD Amount * SOD notification percentage) / 100’
Example
Assume the following for processing alerts:
•
Certificate of Deposit booked is for Rs 100,000 for account CHO123
•
SOD amount for the corresponding CD CHO123 is Rs.90000
•
SOD Notification Percentage is 90%
If the Utilized amount for the OD is equal to or greater than Rs 81,000, then the customer is alerted that the
credit facility against the FD is breached.
The Intermediate data store consists of the following details:
•
DCN
•
BRN
•
Customer Account Number
•
Customer Number
•
Customer Mail
•
Customer Mobile No
•
Utilized Amount
•
Overdraft Amount
•
Dispatch Flag
You need to maintain the following message advice format through the ‘Advice Format
Maintenance’ screen.
#RH
< SOD ACCOUNT UTILIZATION>
Date: _DATE_
Bank Name: _BANK-NAME_
Branch Address: _BRANCH-ADDR_
3-97
Customer Name: _CUST-NAME1_
Customer ID: _CUSTOMER_
Account Number: _ACCOUNT-NO_
OD Amount: _OD_AMOUNT_
Utilized Amount: _UTIL_AMOUNT_
#EH
#B
#SC
#IF _DIFFEQAUL_
Your Account with Account Number _ACCOUNT-NO_ has reached the limit of the OD.
#ENDIF
#IF _DIFFGREATER_
Your Account with Account Number _ACCOUNT-NO_ has breached the limit of the
OD by _DIFFGREATER_
#ENDIF
#EC
#EB
#RF
FOR _BRANCHNAME_
AUTHORIZED SIGNATORY.
#EF
3-98
For more information on Advice Format, refer ‘Maintaining Advice Format’ chapter under
‘Messaging System’ User Manual.
Note the following:
3.7
•
For multiple collaterals you need to consider consolidated limit amount for deriving
the breach limit amount.
•
The process of sending of the SMS alert messages is handled by the third party
system.
•
The system re-uses the following key information for alert generation:
¾
Email ID – from customer personal maintenance
¾
Mobile number – from CIF – personal information
Maintaining Preferences for Document Delivery Mode
You can maintain account level preferences for document delivery mode and document
preference for statements. For this you need to create a statement extract file as part of
statement processing. The statement extract file defines the output destination and
characteristics of the finished statement.
You can do this through the ‘Customer Document Delivery Mode’ screen. You can invoke this
screen by typing ‘STDACDOC’ at the top right corner of the application tool bar and clicking the
adjoining arrow button.
In this screen you can perform the following operations:
•
Open a new record
•
Save a record
•
Unlock a record
3-99
•
Close a record
•
Reopen a record
•
Authorize a record
•
Query an earlier record
You cannot delete a record after authorization.
Specify the following details:
Account Number
Specify the account number. The adjoining option list displays all the valid customer account
numbers maintained in the system. You can select the appropriate one.
Customer ID
System defaults the Customer ID from 'Account Number’. You cannot modify the same.
Customer Name
System defaults the Customer name from 'Account Number’. You cannot modify the same.
Customer Type
Select one of the following to indicate the customer type:
•
Retail
•
Commercial
Check Disposition (Current Cycle)
Select one of the following check disposition values for the current cycle from the drop-down list:
•
R - Return checks with statement
•
T - Do not return checks
•
I - Image checks on the statement (Default)
•
S - Return checks with statement, serial sort
Note the following:
•
If you select ‘I’ under check position, additional data will be shown in the ‘Check
Image specification' and 'Check Image Count' drop-down lists.
•
On the other hand, if you select R T and S values under check disposition, the
‘Check Image specification' and 'Check Image Count' drop-down menus get disabled.
3-100
Check Disposition (Next Cycle)
The value in the this field will be moved to the ‘Current Cycle’ field during the BOD of the
Statement Cycle Date and this field will have null values during the BOD of the Statement Cycle
Date.
Example
If the statement cycle date is 17th of every month and there is a change made in the check disposition ‘next
value’ field on the 25th of August, in that case, the value in the ‘current cycle’ field will be extracted on the
statement cycle date i.e. 17th of September.
The ‘current cycle’ field will be updated with the value in the ‘next cycle’ field on the BOD of 18th of
September.
Check Image Specification
This field gets enabled only if you select ‘I’ for check disposition. In that case the available values
under it are:
•
F - Front of check
•
D - Front and back of check
On the other hand, the check Image specification gets disabled when you select the R, T and S
values for check disposition respectively.
Check Image Count
This gets enabled only when you select ‘I’ in check disposition. 1-10 values are available under
check image count.
It remains disabled when you choose R, T and S values for check disposition respectively.
Enclosure Count
The system automatically generates the enclosure count or the number of checks returned, on
BOD of the primary account statement cycle.
Mail code
Select one of the following mail code values from the drop-down list:
•
D - Do not print
•
P - Print and mail
•
N - Print but do not mail
•
F – Foreign Postage, print and mail
•
S – Special Handling (i.e. multiple copies of a statement to go in the same envelope)
Electronic Statement
Check this box if you need electric statement
3-101
Create CD ROM
Check this box to create CD ROM.
Oracle Flexcube provides the documentation identification number (DIN) and the
documentation identification date (DIN date) which is required for printing check on statement.
3.7.1 Viewing the Document Delivery Mode Preferences
You can view a summary of all document delivery mode preferences for all customer accounts in
the system, using the ‘Document Delivery Mode Summary’ screen. You can invoke this screen by
typing ‘STSACDOC’ in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the
adjoining arrow button.
You can query on records based on any one or all of the following criteria:
•
Authorization Status
•
Account Number
•
Customer Type
3-102
•
Record Status
•
Customer ID
Click ‘Search’ button. The system identifies all records satisfying the specified criteria and
displays the following details for each one of them:
3.8
•
Authorization Status
•
Record Status
•
Branch Code
•
Account Number
•
Customer ID
•
Customer Type
•
Check Disposition (Current Cycle)
Processing Escrow Sweeps
Escrow Sweep is a process in which the system automatically transfers a predefined percentage
of amount that is credited to project account to the Escrow account maintained at the Customer
Account Maintenance level.
When a transaction is saved at the Customer Account Maintenance level, the system verifies for
the following at different levels:
•
Escrow Processing enabled at the Transaction Code Maintenance level
•
Escrow Process enabled for the Credit account
If Escrow Process is enabled for Transaction code and Credit account, then the system
calculates the value of the amount to be blocked for Escrow transfer, based on the Percentage
maintained at the Customer Account level. The system then saves these amount blocks as
Escrow type Amount Blocks, with an unique, original transaction reference number.
On modifications transaction, the block amount would be recomputed accordingly.
During EOD batch process (CASABAT), Escrow amount blocks with block expiry date on or
before the application date are transferred to the Escrow account, maintained at the customer
account level with the transaction code maintained at account class level.
The Amount blocks are placed based on the following conditions:
•
For Future dated transaction, the Amount Block will be placed with the block expiry
date as effective date of transaction.
•
For current dated transaction, the Amount Block will be placed with the block expiry
date as application date.
3-103
•
If the transaction is saved after the currency cut off time, then the Amount Block will
be placed with the block expiry date as next day and system processes Escrow
transfer on the next day.
Cut off time is applicable only for transaction entry and not for authorization of transaction.
Reversal of transaction happens based on the following conditions
3.9
•
If the Reversal of transaction is done on same day, the amount block that is placed
due to the escrow transaction will be removed.
•
If the transaction is reversed on next day after escrow amount block is processed,
then the system reverts the amount from the Escrow account. The negative entries
will be posted with the reversal transaction code maintained at account class level.
Levying Penalty Interest on Notice Accounts
The ‘Notice Account’ is a savings account for which the bank levies ‘Advance Interest’ if the
account holder withdraws an amount more than the ‘Free Amount’. The free amount is the
amount that a customer can withdraw per calendar month from his/her savings account without
providing any notice to the bank and without being liable to pay advance interest.
Oracle FLEXCUBE facilitates the setting up of a ‘Notice Account’ using the ‘Customer Accounts
Maintenance – Notice Preferences’ screen by enabling the option, ‘Advance Interest’. You can
also configure an account class for advance interest by enabling the option, ‘Advance Interest’ at
the ‘Account Class Maintenance – Notice Preferences’ screen.
For more details on the ‘Customer Accounts Maintenance – Notice Preferences’ screen, refer to
the preceding section,titled,’Maintaining Notice Preferences for Withdrawal’.
For more details on the ‘Account Class Maintenance – Notice Preferences’ screen, refer to the
section, ‘Maintaining Notice Preferences’ in the chapter, ‘Maintaining Mandatory Information’ of
this User Manual.
These Notice Accounts are linked to the ‘Notice Period’ maintained at Account Class/Customer
Account level for the withdrawal of amount from the account. The account holder should provide
a notice of specified days/months to the bank to withdraw an amount more than the ‘Free
Amount’. Once the notice period is crossed, the notice becomes active and the customer can
withdraw the noticed amount during the validity period of the notice. For example, if the Notice
Period is 3 months then the customer should inform the Bank 3 months in advance about the
amount the customer wants to withdraw from his account.
The noticed amount can be withdrawn at one go or in several installments within the notice
validity period window. After the validity period expires, the status of the notice remains closed.’
Note the following:
•
The system deducts the advance interest from the credit Interest earned by the
customer on his credit balance in the account
3-104
•
If the customer does not withdraw his free amount during any month he is not
allowed to carry forward the same in the subsequent month
You have to maintain an SDE for advance interest calculation on the amount withdrawn from the
customer account. The system takes up all accounts belonging to a product, for which the option
‘Advance Interest’ in ‘Notice Preferences’ screen is enabled, for calculating the Advance Interest.
For more details on maintaining this SDE refer to the section, ‘Maintaining SDEs for Computing
Advance Interest’ in the chapter, ‘Maintaining System Data Elements’ of the ‘Interest and
Charges‘ User Manual.
The following examples describe the calculation of advance interest:
Example1
Calculation of penalty interest (partial utilization) - In this illustration, the withdrawal amount is only partially
exhausted through free amounts and notices.
Credit interest rate: 2.00 %
Penalty Interest rate: 0.50 %
Notice period: 90 days
Free amount per month: 2000 EUR
Customer withdraws EUR 8.500,00 on 15.07.2005 without any prior notice
The following table describes the calculation of penalty interest in this case
Date
Type
(Free
Amount /
Notice)
Notice /
Free
Amount
Available
Amount
Passed
Basis
Amount for
Penalty
Calculation
Penalty
Days
Penalty
Interest
*
Amount
15.07.20
05
Free
Amount
2000.00
8500.00
6500.00
17(15.07.05
until
31.07.05)
1.53 EUR
01.08.20
05
Free
Amount
2000.00
6500.00
4500.00
31(01.08.05
until
31.08.05)
1.94 EUR
01.09.20
05
Free
Amount
2000.00
4500.00
2500.00
30 (01.09.05
until
30.09.05)
1.04 EUR
3-105
01.10.20
05
Free
Amount
2000.00
2500.00
500.00
12
(Remaining
days so that
total penalty
days is 90)
0.08 EUR
TOTAL
4.60 EUR
Example 2
Calculation of Penalty interest with notices (full utilization) - In this illustration, the withdrawal amount is fully
exhausted through free amounts and notices.
Credit interest rate
: 2.00 %
Penalty Interest rate
: 0.50 %
Notice period
: 90 days
Free amount per month
: 2000 EUR
Available notices:
Notice Initiation date
Notice Activation Date
Notice amount
26.04.2005
25.07.2005
3000
07.05.2005
05.08.2005
3000
22.05.2005
20.08.2005
3500
Let us assume that the free amount for July is not utilized yet (I.e. Free amount available for July is 2000
EUR). Customer withdraws EUR 8.500,00 on 17.07.2005.
The following table describes the calculation of Penalty Interest in this case:
Date
Type
(Free
Amount
/
Notice)
Notice /
Free
Amount
Available
Amount
Passed
Basis
Amount for
Penalty
Calculation
Penalty
Days
17.07.2005
Free
Amount
2000.00
8500.00
6500.00
8
(17.07.05
until
24.07.05)
0.72
EUR
25.07.2005
Notice
Amount
3000.00
6500.00
3500.00
7
(25.07.05
until
31.07.05)
0.34
EUR
01.08.2005
Free
Amount
2000.00
3500.00
1500.00
4
(01.08.05
until
0.08
EUR
3-106
Penalty
Interest
Amount
*
04.08.05)
05.08.2005
Notice
Amount
3000.00
1500.00
0
-
TOTAL
1.15
EUR
3.10 Maintaining Notice Period for Withdrawal
You can specify the notice for withdrawal of amount from the accounts using ‘Notice Period
Maintenance’ screen. You can invoke this screen by typing ‘STDNTPRD’ at the top right corner of
the application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button.
The following details are captured in this screen.
Branch Code
The current branch code is defaulted here
Account Number
Specify the account number for which you wish to maintain the notice period
Initiation Date
Specify the date on which the notice is initiated
After specifying the initiation date click ‘Default’ to display the Notice Id, Activation Date,
Validity Period, End Date and Notice Amount. The system defaults the following fields based on
the Notice Preferences you maintain at the Customer Account level.
3-107
Activation Date
The activation date gets defaulted based on the account number and initiation date entered.This
is the date from which the notice period becomes active. However, you can modify this date.
Validity Period
The validity period of the notice as maintained in the ‘Notice Preferences’ screen at the account
level gets defaulted here. However, you can modify this period
Notice Amount
Specify the amount to be withdrawn within the Notice Period. The amount you specify here
should be in account currency.
The following fields are displayed in this screen:
•
Branch Code – The branch code of the current branch
•
Notice Id – The identification of the notice
•
End Date – The end date of the notice period
Note the following:
•
You can unlock the record and modify details but you cannot make retrospective
changes.
•
You can modify only the inactive notices (i.e. only when application date is less than
activation date of the notice).
•
You can close and reopen the Maintenance.
3.11 Viewing Utilization of Free Amounts
You can view the utilization of free amounts with respect to advance interest for the accounts
using ‘Notice Utilization Query’ screen.
You can invoke this screen by typing ‘STDADINT’ at the top right corner of the application tool bar
and clicking the adjoining arrow button.
3-108
You can query the records based on the following criteria:
•
Branch Code
•
Account Number
•
Year
•
Month
3.12 Viewing Dummy Numbers Associated with CIF Number
To recall, in the Branch Parameters screen, you can specify a number range based on which the
customers of your bank will be assigned CIF numbers for identification. You can also maintain a
dummy CIF number range for a branch. The dummy CIF range will be used for account number
generation.
Refer the Core Services User Manual for details on maintaining dummy CIF number range and its
usage for customer account number generation.
You can view all the dummy CIF numbers linked to a customer in the ‘Dummy Customer
Summary’ screen. To invoke this screen click Customer Maintenance in the Application Browser
and Dummy Customer and Summary under it. You can also invoke this screen by typing
‘STSMAINT’ in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining
arrow button.
3-109
In this screen, you can view the CIF number that is associated with each dummy number.
3.13 Withdrawal of Funds without Penalty
No early withdrawal penalty is charged for the first six days from a time deposit account. For this,
you must maintain an Interest and Charges (IC) period system data element (SDE), ‘Days from
Start’ which will indicate the number of days from deposit initiation to withdrawal date. While
maintaining the penalty formula, you can specify a condition to charge penalty only if the value of
the ‘Days from Start’ SDE is greater than 6 days.
3.14 Closing Account
When you close an account, the system will check whether an IC product linked to the account is
pending liquidation. If an IC Product is pending liquidation, you will be prompted to perform the
liquidation before closing the account.
You can click on the ‘Liquidate’ button to imitate the process whereby the system will calculate all
outstanding amounts for all products involving the account and display the same. On confirming
the details that are displayed the system liquidates the products. You will not be required to
authorize this action.
If any provisioning has been done in respect of the account, the relevant amount is written back
to the GL as specified in the maintenance, on Closure. If the account does not have any IC
products pending liquidation the system will display list of ‘Close Out’ modes in the Account
Closure Details screen.
3-110
In this screen you can select the Close Mode, which is to be used to close the account. The
option list positioned next to this field contains a list of all the Close Modes maintained in the
Customer Account Closing Modes screen. The product linked to the close mode will be defaulted.
Some of the close out modes may require additional details to complete the transaction. These
additional details can pertain to either of the following:
•
The Offset Account
•
The Instrument (when the Close Out is through an Instrument) with which you payoff
the balance in the account
Thus, based on the mode selected the withdrawal entries are booked against the appropriate
product. The balance of the account will drop down to zero. Subsequently, the account is marked
as closed.
3-111
For detailed information on the Customer Account Closing Mode Maintenance screen, you can
refer the Maintaining Customer Account Closing Modes sub-heading in this manual.
3.15 Recording Details of Lodgment Book Requests
For a customer account, you can record details of lodgment book requests, provided the use of
lodgment books is allowed for the account. You can capture these details in the ‘Lodgment Book
Maintenance’ screen. To invoke this screen from the Application Browser, select Customer
Maintenance and Lodgment Book under it. You can also invoke this screen by typing
‘CADLOGBK’ in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the
adjoining arrow button.
For each request, you need to capture the following details:
Account Number
You can specify the account number of the customer account in respect of which the request for
the lodgment book was received.
Start Number for the Lodgment Book
You can specify the start number for the leaves in the lodgment book. This depends upon your
specification in the Bank Wide Parameters, in respect of uniqueness of lodgment book numbers.
The following example illustrates how the specification in the Bank Wide Parameters works:
In the Bank Wide Parameters, you have specified that lodgment book numbers must be unique for the
branch. This means that lodgment numbers need to be unique across all accounts of that branch. For
instance, if a book is maintained with the Start Number as 1, and containing 25 leaves, you cannot start
another book in respect of any other account, with these numbers.
If you have specified that lodgment book numbers must be unique to accounts in the branch, and a book is
maintained with the Start Number as 1, and containing 25 leaves, you cannot start another book in respect
of the same account, with these numbers. However, you can start a book with the same numbers in respect
of another account in the branch.
Number of Leaves
You can specify the number of leaves that the lodgment book is to have
3-112
Order Date and Issue Date
By default, the order date and the issue date of the lodgment book is considered to be the
application date; you can change the dates and specify them as required.
Order Details
You can specify order details as required for the lodgment book
Order Details for Lodgment Printing
If you wish the order details to be sent to the lodgment book-printing agent, you can indicate so.
If you indicate this by checking the Include for Lodgment Printing box, the issue date for the
lodgment book will be updated by the printing interface.
3.16 Querying for Account Statistics
You can view period-wise statistics for an account in the ‘Customer Account Statistics Query’
screen. To invoke this screen, select Queries from the Application Browser then Customer
Accounts and Statistics under it.
You can also invoke this screen by typing ‘ACDSTQRY’ in the field at the top right corner of the
Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button.
Check Linked Customer and provide Account Number and click Query button to view all Account
Numbers of the customers and its linked customers in Linked Customer Details. To query on any
account displayed, select the account and click ‘Fetch’ button. A query operation is performed on
the selected customer and the details are displayed. The displayed values are based on the
query parameters provided.
3-113
The details displayed are as follows:
•
Low and High Balance for a period
The lowest and highest current balances for the period
•
Average credit and debit balance for a period
This is computed as the sum of credit/(debit) current balances in a period, divided by
the number of days of credit/(debit) balance during the period
•
Credit and debit days
The number of days the account was in credit/(debit) balance in the period
•
Credit and Debit Turnover
The credit/ (debit) turnover for the period
•
Excess days in debit balance
The number of days in a month when the account exceeded the overdraft limits
•
Overdraft Limit
This is computed by summing the temporary overdraft limit and the sub-limit of the
account. For each month, this would represent the limit on the last date of the month
•
Credit grade of the Customer
This would be the prevalent rating on the last day of the period. For the current
period, this information is provided up to the previous working day.
Printing of this information for an account is only possible if the Account Statistics option has
been enabled in the Account Class Maintenance for the account class used by the account.
If account statistics has been enabled, an accounting End of Day (EOD) process updates the
statistics table both period-wise and according to financial years. The book-dated balances are
used for computation of statistics, and the balances are maintained according to accounting
periods.
3.17 Viewing Customer Account Balance
You can view the account balance of the customer using ‘Customer Account Balance’ screen. To
invoke this screen by typing ‘STDCUSBL’ at the top right corner of the application tool bar and
clicking the adjoining arrow button.
3-114
The system displays the following details:
•
Branch
•
Account
•
Current Balance
•
Available Balance
•
Status Dormant
•
No Credit
•
No Debit
•
Frozen
•
Customer Category
•
Customer Number
3-115
4. Maintaining Tax Allowance Limit
4.1
Introduction
You can maintain tax-free allowance limit at the customer account level. The allowance limit at
account level will be used only for Interest computed on the account.
4.2
Maintaining Customer Account Tax Allowance
You can access this screen by typing ‘STDCULMT’ in the field at the top right corner of the
Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button. The screen appears as shown below:
Specify the following details.
Customer Account Number
You need to specify the customer account for which you wish to maintain Tax Allowance Limit.
The customer name will be displayed alongside.
Tax Category
Specify the Tax Category for which you wish to maintain tax allowance limit at the customer
account level. The description appears displayed alongside.
Customer Number
You need to specify the Customer Number for which the Customer Account Tax allowance Limit
is being defined.
4-1
Customer Name
The customer name will be displayed alongside.
From Date
You need to specify the date from which the customer account tax allowance limit is effective
To Date
You need to specify the date up to which the customer account tax allowance limit will be
applicable. The End Date should be greater than or equal to the Start Date. You can also leave
the End Date blank which would indicate that the maintenance is open ended.
Limit Amount
You need to specify the allowance amount for the customer account. The utilization of the
allowance would be tracked against the customers and the minimum allowance available at the
account level.
Limit Currency
This indicates the currency of the tax allowance amount for the selected customer account. The
currency appears by default from the Customer Tax Allowance screen and cannot be changed.
Remarks
You may specify any comments you wish to record pertaining to this screen.
4.3
Merging Customers
An existing customer in FLEXCUBE may acquire another customer maintained in FLEXCUBE. In
that case, you need to merge the CIFs of both the customers using ‘Merging Customers’ screen.
4-2
You can also invoke this screen by typing ‘STDCIFMG’ in the field at the top right corner of the
Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button.
You can capture the following details on this screen:
Branch Code
The system displays the branch code that identifies the branch where the account is maintained.
New Customer
Specify the CIF of the surviving customer. The system will merge the non-surviving customer’s
accounts into this CIF. The option list displays all valid CIFs maintained in the system. Choose
the appropriate one.
Old Customer
Specify the CIF of the non surviving customer. The system will merge the accounts associated
with this CIF into the new customer CIF that you have mentioned above. The option list displays
all valid CIFs maintained in the system. Choose the appropriate one.
Date of Merging
The system displays the current application date as the date of merging.
Merging Status
The system displays the status of merger process. If the merger process has already taken place,
the status of this box will be checked. If the process has not taken place, this box will be
unchecked.
4-3
The merger will come into effect during beginning of day process of the following working day.
Henceforth, the system will associate to new old CIF, all transactions related to the old customer.
Once all the accounts have been moved to the new CIF, the system will close the old CIF. In
case of multiple mergers, the last updated CIF will be stored as FKA for the new CIF.
However, there are certain conditions for the CIF merger process to take place. The new CIF
should not have restrictions for any product or account class that is allowed for the old CIF. Also,
the customer category of the new CIF should not have any restriction for an account class
allowed for the customer category of the old CIF. The merger process begins only on meeting
these conditions.
In case of an account that has been merged, along with the new CIF, the system will also display
the old CIF on ‘Customer Accounts Maintenance’ screen.
Example
Company B acquires Company A. In this case, the CIF of company A (merging customer) is to be merged
with the CIF of company B (main customer).
CIF of Company A – AA2011981
CIF of Company B – AN1033129
Further to required validation checks, the system will perform the merger.
Deposit Accounts of Company A:
A/C Type
Account Number
CIF
Savings A/C
0117053005471
AA2011981
Current A/C
0117073000847
AA2011981
Certificate of Deposit
A/C
0117101000546
AA2011981
Deposit Accounts of Company B:
A/C Type
Account Number
CIF
Savings A/C
0117053068903
AN1033129
Current A/C
0117076211000
AN1033129
Certificate of Deposit
A/C
0117176008199
AN1033129
During the beginning of day process of the following working day, the merger will take place. The system will
update the CIF.
A/C Type
Account Number
CIF
Savings A/C
0117053005471
AN1033129
Current A/C
0117073000847
AN1033129
4-4
Certificate of Deposit
A/C
0117101000546
AN1033129
Savings A/C
0117053068903
AN1033129
Current A/C
0117076211000
AN1033129
Certificate of Deposit
A/C
0117176008199
AN1033129
Once all the accounts have been moved to the new CIF (AN1033129), the system will close the old CIF
(AA2011981).
Old CIF will be stored as FKA for the new CIF as shown below:
Customer Number
FKA
AN1033129
AA2011981
A batch program ‘STDCIFMG’ may be maintained for customer merger in FLEXCUBE. You need
to maintain this batch as part of ‘Beginning of Day’ operations.
4-5
5. Maintaining Check Book Details
5.1
Introduction
In the ‘Check book details‘ table you can maintain details of Check books issued to your
customers. In addition, you can view the status of each Check − whether used, canceled,
rejected, or if a stop payment has been issued against it.
When Check-based transactions are initiated in the Data Entry or Funds Transfer modules, the
system updates the amount and date of the transaction in this table. If a Check has been
canceled by the customer, or has been returned unpaid by you, this event can also be captured
with the ‘Stop payment’ table, where you maintain your customers’ instructions for stop payment.
For each Check, the system maintains a history of the Check status. For instance, a customer
requests a stop payment, revokes it, and subsequently this Check is paid by you over clearing.
You can view the three events on this Check in the Check Details table.
The Check book details table is maintained by the individual branches.
5.1.1 Maintaining Check Book Details
You can invoke the ‘Check Book Maintenance’ screen by typing ‘CADCHBOO’ in the field at the
top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button.
5-1
In this screen, you can maintain the following details for a Check book issued to a customer:
•
Customer account number
•
First Check number of the Check book
•
The total number of Check leaves in the book
•
The Kind of Check (whether Euro or Commercial)
•
The date on which the order was placed for the book
•
The date on which the Check book was issued
•
Any other order related detail
Customer Name
The system displays the customer name along with the legal title for the account separated by a
comma.
5.1.2 Defining Check Book Details
The following details need to be maintained for a Check book:
Account Number
Specify the account number of the customer to whom you are issuing a Check book in the
Account Number field. The adjoining option list displays all customer account numbers
maintained in the system. You can choose the appropriate one.
Highlight the customer’s account number, and click ‘Ok’ button to select.
First Check Number
When issuing a Check book, you have to capture the number of the first leaf of the Check book.
Check Leaves
Specify the total number of leaves in the Check book you are issuing the customer.
Kind Of Check book
A Check book for customer can be of two types; commercial and Euro. A radio button is provided
by which you can make your choice, as displayed on the screen. You can issue the Euro Check
book to a customer, whose account specifies for a ‘Euro Checks’ option in the customer account
maintenance screen.
Order Date
This is the date on which the customer placed a request for a new Check book.
5-2
Issue Date
This is the date on which the Check book was issued to the customer.
Order Details
Against ‘order details’, you can enter any detail such as the name of the person who has
collected the book on the customer’s behalf, or the details of any special request for additional
number of leaves in the Check book, and so on.
After having made the required mandatory entries and having saved your work, your user ID will
be displayed at the made by field at the bottom of the screen, the date and time at which you
saved the product will be populated. However, the authorization status will remain blank, which
means that your entries have not been authorized by a user other than you. Status remains open
or closed depending upon the status of the record.
Request Status
Select the status of the Check book request from the adjoining drop-down list. This list displays
the following values:
•
Requested
•
Generated
•
Delivered
•
Destroyed
Request Mode
The system displays the mode by which the Check book request was made. This list displays the
following values:
•
Oracle Flexcube
•
Any other external system
Language Code
Select the language code from the adjoining option. It displays all the language code in the
system.
Delivery Mode
Select the mode of delivery of the Check book from the adjoining drop-down list. This list displays
the following values:
•
Courier
•
Branch
If the delivery mode is ‘Courier’, then you will need to specify the delivery address.
5-3
Delivery Address 1
Specify the address to which the Check book should be delivered. From the adjoining option list,
You can choose the valid account address maintained in the system.
Delivery Address 2- 4
Specify the address to which the Check book should be delivered.
Include for Check Book Printing
When processing automatic reordering of Check books for your branch, a file will be generated
which will include the details of Check books marked for automatic reorder. This file will then be
sent to the Check Book printer. If you select the ‘Include for Check Book Printing’ option, then the
system will include the details of manually reordered Check Books as well in the file to be sent to
the printer.
Automatic reordering of Check Books will be triggered based on your specifications maintained
for an account in the Customer Accounts Maintenance screen.
Refer the ‘Core Entities’ User Manual for more details on the maintenances required for the
same.
Specifying the value of the UDF ‘Check Type’
When maintaining Check Book reordering parameters, you also have to specify the type of Check
that you would like to order. This is captured in the field Check Type, which is maintained as an
UDF.
Refer to the ‘User Defined Fields’ User Manual for details on defining UDFs.
Click ‘Fields’ button in the Check Book Details screen toolbar to invoke the ‘User Defined Fields'
screen.
5-4
The UDF ‘Check Type’ will be displayed in this screen. Select the appropriate value from the
option list provided. The possible values are:
•
J: 20 page x 3.5’ Personal
•
K: 40 page x 3.5’ Business
•
P: 40 page x 3.5’ Business
•
L: 40 page x 3.5’ (2 Part)
•
R: 80 page x 3.5’ Business
5.1.3 Viewing the Status of a Check
For each Check book issued to a customer the system maintains the status of each leaf in the
book.
The status of a Check leaf can be one of the following:
Symbol
Status
Significance
N
Not Used
This Check has not been used
U
Used
This Check has been used
R
Rejected
This Check has been returned without clearance
S
Stopped
A stop payment has been issued for this Check
C
Canceled
This Check has been canceled
5-5
To view the status of a Check book the details of which are on display, click ‘View Check Status’
button, on the ‘Check Book Maintenance’ table. The ‘View Check Status’ table is invoked.
Here you can view the status of all the leaves in this Check book. The ‘Check Number’ on display
is the number of the first leaf on this Check book and is defaulted from the ‘Check Book Details’
screen.
The Check leaf status can be viewed in a matrix form. The column number should be suffixed to
the row number to arrive at the Check number whose status you want to view. For example, in
the matrix above the second row number - 000000000000001 when suffixed with 0 would give
the status of the Check number 0000000000000010, which is under a stop payment order.
To move up and down the matrix, click on the upward and downward arrow respectively on the
side of the matrix.
You have the option of manually changing the status of any of the Check leaves; except a Check,
which has been ‘used’ or a Check under a stopped payment order. The stop payment order can
be for a Check or a series of Checks and is maintained in the ‘stop payment’ table from where it
gets updated in the status table.
5.1.4 Viewing Details of a Check and changing its Status
To change the status of any leaf in a book, go to that leaf’s status block in the status matrix, and
double click on the block. You will be returned to the ‘Check Details’ table. The ‘Check Details'
table is invoked from the Application Browser.
5.1.5 Maintaining Check Details
You can invoke the ‘Check Details Maintenance’ screen by typing ‘CADCHKDT’ in the field at the
top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button.
5-6
If you have invoked this screen by double clicking on the Check status, all details related to the
Check would be displayed in the ‘Check details’ screen.
If the screen has been invoked from the Application Browser, then click on the account number (a
display field), press F7 and enter the account number of this customer, whose Check status you
want to view.
Then press F8. The details of a Check leaf would be displayed. The system displays the
customer name along with the legal title for the account separated by a comma. Move to the
concerned ‘Check number’ record by using the arrow buttons on the toolbar or the <down arrow>
key of your keyboard. You can also invoke the Check details by inputting the Check number, the
details of which you want to view. The ‘Amount’, ‘Beneficiary’, ‘Presented On’, ‘Date on Check’
are populated from the concerned module from where the Check transaction took place. You can
change any of the details.
In this screen the following details are updated from the front-end modules − Data Entry and
Funds Transfer for a Check issued to a customer:
•
Amount for which the Check is drawn
•
Status of the Check
•
Date on which the Check was presented for encashment
To modify a status detail, select ‘Modify’ from the Actions Menu in the Application toolbar or click
unlock icon. Make the desired changes. Remember, the following points while modifying:
•
A ‘used’ status cannot be changed
•
A stop status Check cannot be changed
•
‘Not used’ status can be changed to rejected/canceled
•
A ‘Canceled’ status cannot be changed
5-7
•
‘Rejected’ status can be changed to ‘used’
A Check may have passed through a series of status changes. The modification number moves
up serially, each time you change the status of a Check. To view the status, click the arrow button
under Modification Number. This arrow will take you through the modifications.
To view the modification history of a Check, click ‘History’ button ,to display the ‘Check Details History’ table. This table lists in a tabular form each successive modification detail that this Check
has undergone. The amount for which the Check was issued, the presentation date and the value
date of the Check are also displayed. The serial number represents the modification number.
To exit from the ‘Check Details - History’ table, click ‘Exit’ or ‘Cancel’ button. If you have invoked
the table from the Application Browser you would be returned to the Browser. If you have invoked
this table from the ‘Check Status’ screen you would be returned to the ‘Check Status’ table.
5-8
6. Maintaining Account Structure
6.1
Introduction
Oracle FLEXCUBE repays loan from multiple accounts. In Oracle FLEXCUBE, the loan account
is the primary account and all the other accounts linked to it are cover accounts. While paying the
settlement if the primary account has insufficient amount, the system will check the cover
accounts for the remaining amount according to the preference.
In case of single account structure, the primary account will have only one cover account and the
cover account will have only one primary account for making the account structure free of
duplicate accounts. Every account has its own account structure. While closing an account under
an account structure, you need to remove that account from the account structure manually else
the system will not allow the closure of the account. If you want to amend an account structure,
the system will check whether any amount block is open on the account structure. If any amount
block is opened, then the system will throw an error. You can also configure the error code.
6.2
Defining Account Structure
You can specify the account structure in the ‘Account Structure Maintenance’ screen. You can
invoke this screen by typing ‘CADSTRUC‘ in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool
bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button.
Here you can specify the following details:
Structure Group
The system generates and displays the unique structure group code that should be used to
identify the account structure.
6-1
Description
Specify the information about the customer to whom this structure group belongs.
Seq No
Specify the store sequence number of the parent cover account. This number is used to identify
the preference level of the cover account.
Primary Account
Specify the primary account that should be linked with the specified sequence number.
Primary Account Branch
Specify the branch code of the primary account.
Primary Account Currency
Specify the currency code of the primary account.
Cover Account
Specify the cover account that should be linked with the specified sequence number.
Cover Account Branch
Specify the branch code of the cover account.
Cover Account Currency
Specify the currency code of the cover account.
6.3
Viewing Account Structure Maintenance Summary
You can view the summary details of the account structure in the ‘Account Structure Maintenance
Summary’ screen.
6-2
To invoke this screen, type ‘CASSTRUC‘ in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool
bar and click the adjoining arrow button.
You can query on records based on any or all of the following criteria:
•
Authorization Status
•
Structure Group
•
Record Status
•
Description
Click ‘Search’ button. The system identifies all records satisfying the specified criteria and
displays the following details for each one of them:
•
Authorization Status
•
Structure Group
•
Record Status
•
Description
6-3
7. Maintaining Amount Blocks
7.1
Defining Amount Blocks
An amount block is that part of the balance in a customer’s account, which you wish to reserve for
a specific purpose. It can be specified for an account either on the directions of the customer or at
the behest of the bank.
When an amount block is set for an account, the balance available for withdrawal is the current
balance of the account minus the blocked amount. On expiry of the period for which the amount
block is defined the system automatically updates the amount block Check in the ‘Customer
Accounts’ table.
Example
If the balance in an account is 1000 currency units and the amount block defined is 500 currency units, the
actual funds available for withdrawal is only 500 units. An override will be required if the customer withdraws
a higher amount.
When a debit to a customer account is made, where the transaction amount exceeds the
available balance in the account, the system asks for an ‘override’.
Amount blocks are maintained in the ‘Amount Block Maintenance’ table.
7.1.1 Defining Amount Block Reasons
Whenever you impose an amount block (hold) on customer accounts, a valid reason can be
assigned for having effected the hold. You can define these reasons using the ‘Hold
Maintenance’ screen.
7-1
You can invoke this screen by typing ‘CODHOLDT’ in the field at the top right corner of the
Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button.
You can capture the following details here:
Hold Code
Specify a code for the amount block reason you are maintaining in the system.
The Hold Code can be a maximum of 15 characters (alphanumeric type) in length.
Hold Description
Provide a brief description of the hold code.
Hold Type
In case you are defining amount hold reasons for automated system hold, select the hold type
from the adjoining drop-down list. The available options are:
•
Salary Hold
•
Overdue Hold
•
Guarantor Recovery Hold
•
External Deal Hold
•
None
Except ‘None’, for all other Hold Types mentioned above, only one Hold Code each can be
maintained in the system.
7-2
7.1.1.1 Viewing Hold Code Summary
You can view a summary of Hold Codes maintained in the system using the ‘Hold Summary’
screen. You can invoke this screen by typing ‘COSHOLDT’ in the field at the top right corner of
the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button.
You can query on records based on any or all of the following criteria:
•
Authorization Status
•
Hold Code
•
Record Status
•
Hold Type
Click ‘Search’ button. The system identifies all records satisfying the specified criteria and
displays the following details for each one of them:
•
Authorization Status
•
Record Status
•
Hold Code
•
Hold Description
•
Hold Type
7-3
7.1.2 Maintaining Individual Amount Blocks
You can maintain amount blocks on individual accounts of a customer using the ‘Amount Block
Input’ screen. You can invoke this screen by typing ‘CADAMBLK’ in the field at the top right
corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button.
You can capture the following details here:
Account Number
Specify a valid account number of the customer for which you wish to maintain an amount block.
The adjoining option list displays all valid customer accounts maintained in the system. You can
select the appropriate one.
Sequence Number
The system automatically displays the amount block sequence number.
Amount
Specify the amount to be blocked.
Effective Date
Specify the date from which the amount block is effective.
For CASA amount block type, the effective date is the branch current date.
Expiry Date
Specify the date on which the amount block is released, so that it is available for withdrawal to the
customer.
For CASA amount block type, there is no expiry date.
7-4
Amount Block Type
Select the amount block type from the adjoining drop-down list. The available options are:
•
FLEXCUBE
•
Switch
•
PreAuth
•
Escrow
•
System
•
CASA - indicates an amount block that is created due to debit transaction processing in
Primary Accounts.
•
Bulk Salary
The option ‘System’ indicates a system generated amount block, equivalent to the external
deal amount maintained in the system. You cannot modify a ‘System’ type of amount block.
During debit transaction processing, Oracle FLEXCUBE will use ‘Mid Rate’, if the primary
account currency and cover account currency are different.
Remarks
Specify remarks about the amount block, if any.
Reference No
The system generates a unique reference number upon saving the record.
Note the following:
•
For system generated amount blocks corresponding to external deals, Oracle
FLEXCUBE Reference number automatically generated in External Deal linkage screen
gets defaulted here.
•
The system generated Escrow amount blocks, are identified with an unique original
transaction Reference No.
•
You are not allowed to modify or close Escrow Amount Blocks.
Hold Code
Specify a valid hold code. The adjoining option list displays all valid hold codes maintained in the
system. You can select the appropriate one.
Hold Description
The system displays the hold code description.
7-5
For system generated amount blocks corresponding to external deals, the description
maintained at Hold Code Maintenance screen for Hold Code Type ‘External Deal’ gets displayed
here.
For more details related to external deal maintenance, refer Core Services User Manual.
7.1.3 Viewing Amount Block
You can view a summary of Amount Blocks maintained at the ‘Amount Block Input’ level using
‘Amount Block Summary’ screen.
You can invoke the ‘Amount Block Summary’ screen by typing ‘CASAMBLK’ in the field at the top
right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button.
You can view records based on any or all of the following criteria:
Authorization Status
You can view records based on the authorization status of the amount blocks by selecting an
option from the adjoining drop-down list. This list provides the following options:
•
Authorized–Select this option if the amount block is Authorized.
•
Unauthorized–Select this option if the amount block is unauthorized.
7-6
Record Status
You can view records based on the record status of the account class transfer by selecting an
option from the adjoining drop-down list. This list provides the following options:
•
Open–Select this option if the account class transfer is not effective.
•
Closed–Select this option if the account class transfer is effective.
Account Number
Select an account number if you need to view records based on the account number, from the
adjoining option list.
Sequence Number
Select a sequence number if you need to view records based on the sequence number, from the
adjoining option list.
Amount
Specify the amount blocked if you need to view records based on the blocked amount.
Effective Date
Select the effective date of the amount block if you need to view records based on the effective
date, from the adjoining calendar icon.
Expiry Date
Select the expiry date of the amount block if you need to view records based on the expiry date,
from the adjoining calendar icon.
Reference No
Select the reference number of the amount if you need to view records based on the reference
number.
The system generated original transaction Reference No of Escrow amount blocks will also
be displayed.
Click ‘Search’ button. The system identifies all records satisfying the specified criteria and
displays the following details for each one of them:
•
Authorization Status
•
Record Status
•
Account Number
•
Sequence Number
•
Amount
7-7
•
Effective Date
•
Expiry Date
•
Reference No
7.1.4 Maintaining Consolidated Amount Block Details
You can invoke the ‘Consolidated Amount Block Input’ screen by typing ‘CADAMBLC’ in the field
at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button.
In this table, you maintain all amount block details enforced for a customer account. Any number
of amount blocks can be enforced for an account.
The following information will be available in this screen:
•
All the accounts maintained for the customer
•
The available balance in each account
•
Active amount blocks, if any
•
Whether the account is marked for no-debit (‘Full Amount Block’ option is Checks)
7-8
•
The user defined fields (UDFs) associated with the Customer (i.e. the UDFs mapped to
the function id ‘STDCIF’)
•
You can also do a query based on the UDFs
In addition to viewing the amount block details for an account, you can also define new blocks or
modify the details pertaining to existing amount blocks, if any. You can also use this screen to
mark the account for no-debits.
You can specify the following for a new amount block:
•
Amount for which the block has been enforced
•
Period for which this block should remain effective
•
Any remark applicable to this amount block. It could be the purpose for which the block
has been enforced.
7.1.5 Maintaining Consolidated Amount Blocks
If you are maintaining consolidated amount blocks for the first time for a customer account, you
need to select the name of the customer from the option-list provided. On selection of the
customer, all accounts maintained for the customer that are available in the current branch will be
displayed in the middle section of the screen along with existing amount block details, if any.
Select an account to view all the individual amount blocks for the selected account in the lower
half of the screen.
To create a new amount block, click add icon. The sequence number for each amount block will
be automatically created by the system.
Maintain the following parameters for the amount block:
Amount
Specify the amount that you would like to block in the account. When an amount block is set for
an account, the balance available for transaction would be the current balance of the account
minus the blocked amount.
Whenever a customer account is debited of an amount that exceeds the available balance in the
account, the system asks for an ‘override’. Note that the available funds in a blocked account will
always be shown to be the current balance less the amount block.
The ‘Blocked Amount’ field in the middle section of the screen will display the sum of all the
amount blocks placed on the account.
You can raise the blocked amount for an account. On authorization, the ‘Customer Accounts’
table will be updated with the modified blocked amount.
7-9
Effective Date
When defining amount blocks for an account, specify the date on which the amount block comes
into effect. A future-dated amount block comes into effect when the Beginning of Day process is
executed for the day (on which the amount block becomes effective).
Expiry Date
This is the day on which the amount block expires. An amount block is effective till the EOD is run
on the expiry date. On expiry of an amount block, the block amount status in the ‘Customer
Accounts Maintenance’ table gets updated (if no other amount block is enforced on this account).
The balance available for transaction is also updated.
Remarks
Here you can enter any remark specific to this amount block. For example, you can capture the
purpose for which a block has been affected.
No Debit
When defining amount blocks, you can choose to completely block the account from any kind of
debits made to the account. To do this, select the option ‘No Debit’. At a later point, you can UN
Check this option to release the full block and define partial blocks if required.
Close
As stated earlier, the amount block will remain active from the effective date till the expiry date.
However, you can release a block before the expiry date. Select the ‘Close’ option to affect a
forceful closure of the amount block. If you do not select this option, the amount block will be
released as part of the EOD batch process executed on the expiry date.
7-10
8. Maintaining Stop Payment Details
8.1
Introduction
A Stop Payment maintained in the ‘stop payment’ table is an instruction given by a customer to
his bank directing it to stop payment against a Check. This instruction can be based on any of the
following:
•
A single Check number
•
A range of Check numbers
•
The amount for which the Check is drawn
•
A combination of Check number and amount for which the Check is drawn
You can maintain stop payment instructions for Checks issued from within Oracle FLEXCUBE as
well as external Checks. At the time of creating a stop payment instruction, the system validates
the Check number against the existing details. Since details of external Checks are not available
internally, the system displays an override.
If you confirm the override, Flexcube will store the external check details in check details
maintenance with the status as ‘Stopped’ and the check type as ‘EXTN’ at the backend .External
check details which are stopped will not be available through the Check Book Maintenance and
the Check Details Maintenance screens.
When a stop payment is affected, the stop payment status in the ‘Customer Accounts
Maintenance’ table gets updated to indicate the presence of a stop payment instruction for the
customer account. Whenever a Check based transaction is initiated through Data Entry or Funds
Transfer the system validates if any stop payment instruction has been issued against it. Payment
against a Check is stopped if a stop payment instruction exists for that Check.
Stop payment for a Check can be specified for a defined period. You can also maintain a stop
payment bearing no expiry date i.e., the instruction remains effective until revoked.
8.2
Maintaining Stop Payment Orders
You can invoke the ‘Stop Payment Input’ screen by typing ‘CADSPMNT’ in the field at the top
right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button.
8-1
In this table you maintain all stop payment orders enforced for a customer account. The
sequence number of the present stop payment instruction is displayed in the field ‘Stop Payment
No’.
Here you define the following:
•
Account number on which you are enforcing a stop payment
•
Whether stop payment is being defined against Check/Checks or an amount
•
If stop payment is based on Check then the start and end Check numbers
•
If stop payment is based on amount then the Check amount
•
Amount for which the stop payment has been enforced
•
Period for which this stop payment should remain effective
•
Any remark applicable to this stop payment. It could be the purpose for which it has been
enforced
8.2.1 Maintaining Stop Payment Instructions
Any number of stop payment instructions can be maintained for an account. With each stop
payment instruction enforced on an account, the system displays the stop payment number. This
number denotes the number of the current stop payment records being maintained for this
account.
For maintaining details of stop payment instruction, the following parameters need to be
maintained:
8-2
Account Number
Specify the account number of the account for which you wish to enforce a stop payment. The
adjoining option list displays the list of account numbers maintained. Highlight the customer’s
account number for whom you are entering details.
Stop Payment type
This refers to the basis for the Stop Payment Instruction and can be any one of the following:
•
An amount
•
Check No
•
Both (amount and Check)
When an amount is stopped for an account for a particular period and when any debit transaction
is triggered for that account with that stopped amount during stop payment period, system will
throw an override to you:
There is a stop payment for a check with this Amount. Proceed?
You may confirm with the customer and decide whether to proceed or reject the transaction.
The stop payment type will be both, when a stop payment is made using both type, for an
account, mentioning a particular amount and check no for a particular period.
If any debit transaction is triggered with that particular stopped check but with different amount,
then system will throw an override to you:
Stop payment exists for this check. Proceed?
You may confirm with the customer and decide whether to proceed or reject the transaction.
If the instruction is Check-based, the customer would give you the number of that Check. If the
instruction pertains to a range of Checks, the customer would give you the number of the first
Check and the last Check in the range.
Start Check Number
This is the first Check of the range. If the instruction is specified for a range of Checks, the
number of the first and the last Check of the range should be specified by the customer.
If the instruction is to withhold payment for one Check alone, enter the same Check number in
both the ‘start Check number’ and the ‘end Check number’ fields.
This is not mandatory if the stop payment type is an ‘amount’.
8-3
End Check Number
This is the last Check of the range. If the instruction is specified for a range of Checks, the
number of the first and the last Check of the range should be specified by the customer.
This is not mandatory if the stop payment type is an ‘amount’.
Check Amount
If the stop payment type is ‘amount’, the Check amount represents the amount for which the
Check was drawn.
Confirmation Status
The confirmation status indicates whether you have confirmed the stop payment instruction
issued by the customer.
Effective Date
This is the date on which the stop payment comes into effect. A future-dated stop payment is
affected after the Beginning of Day process has been executed for the day (the effective date of
the stop payment).
Expiry Date
The stop payment expires on this day. A stop payment is effective till the End of Day is run on the
expiry date. On expiry of a stop payment, the status in the ‘Customer Accounts Maintenance’
table gets updated (if no other stop payment is enforced on this account).
If you do not specify an expiry date, the stop payment will remain effective till it is revoked.
Remarks
Here, you can enter information specific to the stop payment that you are capturing. For example,
you can indicate the purpose for which the stop payment has been issued.
Customer Name
The system displays the customer name along with the legal title for the account separated by a
comma.
After having made the required mandatory entries, and having saved your work, your user ID will
be displayed at the ‘Made By’ field at the bottom of the screen, the Date and the Time at which
you saved the product will be populated.
Another user, with the requisite rights, should authorize any operation that you perform, before
the End of Day process is executed for the day.
Using this screen, you can stop payment of Checks based on the following conditions:
•
For Checks within a specified range of Checks numbers.
8-4
8.3
•
For a single Check with a specified serial number.
•
For a single Check with a specified serial number and specific amount.
•
For Checks within certain tolerance limit on amount
Maintaining Stop Payment Order EFT/ACH Direct Debit
You can stop the Electronic Fund Transfer (EFT) and ACH debits for a specific company, amount
or from a specific originator using the ‘Stop Payment Order EFT/ACH Direct Debit’ screen. You
can invoke this screen by typing ‘CSDSTREG’ in the field at the top right corner of the Application
tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button.
Specify the following fields:
Stop Payment Reference Number
The system displays the payment reference number.
Order Type
Select the order type from the adjoining drop-down list. This list displays the following values:
•
Stop Payment Order
•
Revoke the Authorization
•
Stop Payment-ACH direct debits
8-5
Customer Number
Specify the customer number who instructed the bank for stop payment. The adjoining option list
displays the customer numbers that are maintained in the system. You can select the appropriate
one.
Account Branch
Specify the branch to which the instruction was given. The adjoining option list displays the
account branches based on the customer number selected. You can select the appropriate one.
Account Number
Specify the account number of the customer. The adjoining option list displays the account
numbers based on the customer number selected. You can select the appropriate one.
Transaction Amount
Select the transaction amount from the adjoining drop-down list. This list displays the following
values:
•
Exact match of amount
•
Amount range (from and to amount)
•
Amount >= certain amount.
•
Amount <= certain amount.
•
ALL
From Amount
Specify the amount from which the payment is to be stopped. This field will not be applicable if
you have selected ‘All’ in the ‘Transaction Amount’ field.
To Amount
Specify the amount up to which the payment is to be stopped. This field will be applicable only if
the transaction amount falls within the amount-criterion range.
Reference/Agreement ID
Specify the reference number or agreement identification number. The adjoining option list
displays the reference/agreement id based on the order type selected. You can select the
appropriate one.
Note the following:
•
If you have selected ‘Stop Payment Order’ in the Order Type field, the details like
Instruction reference number, product category, customer account no, customer name,
counter party account no and name of an authorized PC instructions will be displayed in
the option list.
8-6
•
If you have selected ‘Stop Payment-ACH direct debits’ in the Order Type field, the details
of the existing PC client agreements will be displayed in the option list.
•
If you have selected ‘ALL’ in the Account Branch, Account No, and Transaction Amount
field, then these fields can be used as wild card entries (Not bound to particular field
value). If you have not selected an Instruction number, then it indicates that the stop
payment is applicable for all the related PC Instructions for this customer, otherwise the
stop payment is applied only on the selected PC instruction.
Communication Mode
Select the communication mode from the adjoining drop-down list. This list displays the following
value:
•
Oral
•
Written
Received Date
Specify the date on when the instruction for the stop payment is received. The received date
should not be greater than the system date.
Confirmed
Check this box to indicate that the stop payment is confirmed.
Note the following:
•
If you have selected this check box, the confirmation date will be changed to system date
and expiry date will be received date + maximum period for renewing the existing stop
pay order or you can change the expiry date as required.
•
If you have not selected this check box, then the system defaults the confirmation date
and expiry date as received date + confirmation days in calendar days. There will be no
payments executed during effective date and expiry date.
Confirm Date
The system displays the date based on the stop payment confirmation. The confirmed date
should not be less than the received date specified in the ‘Received Date’ field.
If the received date + maximum calendar days for receiving the written confirmation from the
received date is lesser than the confirmation date, then the system throws an error stating that
'Confirmation Received After the Due Date’
Effective Date
Specify the date from when the payment is to be stopped.
8-7
Expiry Date
The system displays the date based on the stop payment confirmation. The expiry date should
not be less than the system date and effective date specified in the ‘Effective Date’ field.
If the customer requests for the renewal of stop payment, you can change the expiry date of
the existing stop payment.
Status
The system displays the status of the stop payment
Remarks
Specify the remarks, if any.
Once you have entered the details and save the records, the following details will be displayed
based on the order type selected. You can only view it.
•
Reference/Agreement ID
•
Product Category
•
Account Branch
•
Account Number
•
Customer Name
•
CP Account #
•
Transaction Amount
While revoking the authorization, the confirmation date and the expiry date will be the same. The
payment instruction end date will be updated as effective date of revoke payment order and the
payment will be stopped.
If revoke authorization of payment is confirmed before expiry date, the expiry date will be updated
to minimum end date of the payment instructions and there will be no payments executed further.
Otherwise, an EOD batch program will update the end date of the payment instruction to null.
Viewing Stop Payment Order EFT/ACH Direct Debit
Details
8.4
You can view the stop payment order for EFT and Ach direct debit details in the ‘Stop Payment
Order EFT/ACH Direct Debit Summary’ screen. To invoke this screen, type ‘CSSSTREG’ in the
field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and click on the adjoining arrow button.
8-8
You can query on records based on any or all of the following criteria:
•
Authorization Status
•
Record Status
•
Stop Payment Reference No
•
Customer Number
•
Account Branch
•
Account Number
•
Transaction Amount
•
Reference/Agreement ID
•
Order Type
•
Communication Mode
•
Received Date
•
Confirmed
•
From Amount
•
To Amount
8-9
Click ‘Search’ button. The system identifies all records satisfying the specified criteria and
displays the following details for each one of them:
•
Authorization Status
•
Record Status
•
Stop Payment Reference No
•
Customer Number
•
Account Branch
•
Account Number
•
Transaction Amount
•
Reference/Agreement ID
•
Order Type
•
Communication Mode
•
Received Date
•
Confirmed
•
From Amount
•
To Amount
8-10
9. Generating Account Statements
9.1
Introduction
An account statement is the record of transactions and their effect on account balances over a
specified period of time for a given account. An account statement lists the debits and credits that
have taken place over a time period.
A detailed statement gives minute details of the transactions that have occurred on a given
account, including the order of details, ultimate beneficiary, payment method etc. On the other
hand a summary statement shows all transactions but gives only limited details of individual
transactions like the reference number, date and the amount with a debit/credit indicator.
SWIFT account statements are statements generated for NOSTRO type of accounts, i.e., for a
bank type of a customer. MT940 is generated for an account with its primary statement as
detailed and a MT950 is generated for an account with its primary statement as summary.
9.2
Maintaining Statement Preferences
You need to maintain a basic set-up at the following levels to generate account statements:
•
Advice Formats
•
Account Class
•
Message Type
•
Customer Address
•
Batch EOD Inputs
9.2.1.1 Maintaining Advertisement Information for Account Statement
Oracle Flexcube allows you to maintain advertising information at the account level. This
maintenance is done through the ’Advertisement Maintenance’ screen. Invoke this screen by
typing ‘STDADVMT’ in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the
adjoining arrow button.
9-1
The standard operations allowed in this screen are:
•
New
•
Save
•
Copy
•
Unlock
•
Delete
In this screen, you need to specify the following advertising information details:
Type
Select one of the following to indicate the advertising information type:
•
Branch- Advertising Information at the Branch level
•
Account Class - Advertising Information at the Account Class level
Branch Code/ Account Class
Specify the branch code or account class for which advertising information is to be maintained.
The adjoining option list displays all the valid branch codes, class codes along with their
description, maintained in the system. Select the appropriate one.
Advertisement
Enter the advertising message which should ideally be of 200 characters in length.
The advertising information maintained for the branch and the account will appear in the
account statement format ACST_DETAILED, for the tags ADVINFOBR_ and _ADVINFOACLS_
respectively.
9-2
Click on save icon to save the details maintained in this screen. Click on cancel button to cancel
the same.
9.3
Specifying Format of Account Statements
Oracle FLEXCUBE offers you a format, on the basis of which you can maintain a layout for
account statements to be generated. The maintenance form shown below offers you the flexibility
of maintaining format details – like the lines per page and columns per page – according to your
requirements, as also to maintain the tags required for populating the details. The system
generates account statements, including ad hoc account statements, according to the
maintenance provided by you.
You can invoke the ‘Advice Format Maintenance’ screen by typing ‘MSDADVFT’ in the field at the
top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button.
You need to maintain two advice formats – one for Savings accounts and the other for Nostro
accounts viz ‘ACST_DETAILED’ and ‘SWIFT’ respectively as shown below.
9.3.1 ACST_DETAILED
You need to maintain details as shown in the screen below.
Format Text
Specify the following format.
9-3
#RH
#SC
_BANK-NAME_
#IF _ASOFDT_
COPY AS OF _ASOFDT_
#ENDIF
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------_CUSTNAME_
Account Branch : _BRNAME_
_ADDRESSONE_
Branch Address : _BRADDR1_
_ADDRESSTWO_
_BRADDR2_
_ADDRESSTHREE_
_BRADDR3_
_ADDRESSFOUR_
Cust ID
Account No
: _CUSTNO_
: _ACCOUNTNO_
Account Desc. : _ACCOUNTDESC_
Account Class : _ACLASSNAME_
Account Currency: _ACYNAME_
9-4
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Statement From
: _FROMDATE_ To : _TODATE_
#EC
#IF _OPENBALANCE_
Account Open Date : _OPENDATE_
_A_OPENING BALANCE _DRCR_ _OPENBALANCE_
_AVLBAL_
_B_
_B_ AVAILABLE BALANCE
#ENDIF
#EH
#PH
STATEMENT OF ACCOUNT
Statement From
_pg_
-------------------
: _FROMDATE_
-----------------
Trn Code/Narrative
Closing Balance
-------------------
: _ACCOUNTNO_
---------- ----------
REFERENCE
-----------------
To : _TODATE_
--------------- ---------------- -----------------------
Book Date Value Date
---------- ----------
#EH
#B
#LOOP
#IF _TRNCODEDESC_
9-5
PAGE :
Withdrawal
Deposit
--------------- ---------------- -----------------------
_A__TRNCODEDESC_
_TRNREFNO_
_BDT_
_CRAMOUNT_
_BALAFTERTXN_
_DUMMY_
_VALDATE_
_DRAMOUNT_
#ENDIF
#IF _ADDLINFO_
_A__ADDLINFO_
_DUMMY_
#ENDIF
#ENDLOOP
#EB
#RF
=========================================================================
================================================================
_A_Totals
_DEBITVALUE_
--------------
_A_
_CREDITVALUE_ _A_
--------------
No. of DEBITS
_ND_ AND CREDITS
_NC_ _B_
=========================================================================
================================================================
CLOSING BALANCE _DRC_
_AVLBALANCE_ _B_
_CLOSEBALANCE_
_B_ AVAILABLE BALANCE
_UNCOLBALANCE_
_B_ BLOCKED BALANCE
#IF _UNCOLBALANCE_
UNCOLLECTED BALANCE
_BLOCKEDBALANCE_ _B_
#ENDIF
_A__ADVINFOBR_
_A__ADVINFOACLS_
9-6
* = UNAUTH ENTRY / R = REVERSAL
*** End Of Statement ***
#EF
9.3.1.1 Term Deposit Account Statement Format
You can use the following format in generating Term Deposit Advice:
#RH
#SC
_BANK-NAME_
#IF _ASOFDT_
COPY AS OF _ASOFDT_
#ENDIF
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------_CUSTNAME_
Account Branch : _BRNAME_
_ADDRESSONE_
Branch Address : _BRADDR1_
_ADDRESSTWO_
_BRADDR2_
_ADDRESSTHREE_
_BRADDR3_
_ADDRESSFOUR_
Cust ID
: _CUSTNO_
9-7
Account No
: _ACCOUNTNO_
Account Desc. : _ACCOUNTDESC_
Account Class : _ACLASSNAME_
Account Currency: _ACYNAME_
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Statement From
: _FROMDATE_ To : _TODATE_
#EC
#IF _OPENBALANCE_
Account Open Date : _OPENDATE_
_A_OPENING BALANCE _DRCR_ _OPENBALANCE_
_AVLBAL_
_B_
#ENDIF
#SC
Term Deposit Details
-------------------------------#IF _ACLASSNAME_
Grace Period
:_GRACEPERIOD_
Interest basis
:_INTBASIS_
Penalty Applied
:_PENALTYAPP_
Penalty Value
Interest Rate
:_PENALTYVAL_
:_INTRATE_
9-8
_B_ AVAILABLE BALANCE
Floating Rate code
:_FRATECODE_
Charge Amount
:_CHGAMT_
Maturity Date of TD
:_MATDATE_
#ENDIF
#EC
#EH
#PH
STATEMENT OF ACCOUNT
Statement From
_pg_
-------------------
: _FROMDATE_
-----------------
Trn Code/Narrative
Closing Balance
-------------------
: _ACCOUNTNO_
---------- ----------
REFERENCE
-----------------
To : _TODATE_
PAGE :
--------------- ---------------- -----------------------
Book Date Value Date
---------- ----------
Withdrawal
Deposit
--------------- ---------------- -----------------------
#EH
#B
#LOOP
#IF _TRNCODEDESC_
_A__TRNCODEDESC_
_TRNREFNO_
_BDT_
_CRAMOUNT_
_BALAFTERTXN_
_DUMMY_
#ENDIF
#IF _ADDLINFO_
9-9
_VALDATE_
_DRAMOUNT_
_A__ADDLINFO_
_DUMMY_
#ENDIF
#ENDLOOP
#EB
#RF
=========================================================================
================================================================
_A_Totals
_DEBITVALUE_
--------------
_A_
_CREDITVALUE_ _A_
--------------
No. of DEBITS
_ND_ AND CREDITS
_NC_ _B_
=========================================================================
================================================================
CLOSING BALANCE _DRC_
_AVLBALANCE_ _B_
_CLOSEBALANCE_
_B_ AVAILABLE BALANCE
_UNCOLBALANCE_
_B_ BLOCKED BALANCE
#IF _UNCOLBALANCE_
UNCOLLECTED BALANCE
_BLOCKEDBALANCE_ _B_
#ENDIF
_A__ADVINFOBR_
_A__ADVINFOACLS_
* = UNAUTH ENTRY / R = REVERSAL
*** End Of Statement ***
#EF
9-10
Term Deposit Advice Tags
The advice tags used in generating term Deposit advice are listed below:
Advice Tags
Description
_GRACEPERIOD_
Grace Period
_INTBASIS_
Interest basis
_PENALTYAPP_
Penalty applicable
_PENALTYVAL_
Penalty Value
_INTRATE_
Interest Rate
_FRATECODE_
Floating Rate code
_CHGAMT_
Charge amounts computed on the account
_MATDATE_
Maturity Date of TD
•
Grace Period: This tag displays the period wherein the customer has the option to walk into the
bank after maturity to take a decision on his deposit without any financial loss
•
Interest basis: This is based on IC product - Actual/365, 30Euro etc.
•
Penalty applicable: If Partial redemption happens in the deposit, then this tag in the statement would
identify whether penalty was collected on that or not.
•
Penalty Value: This tag displays the penalty value collected.
•
Interest Rate : This tag displays the rate at which interest is calculated for TD
•
Floating Rate code: This tag displays the floating rate code used along with UDE in interest rate
calculation. This will be for the latest effective date.
•
Charge amounts computed on the account: Under this tag, charge amount collected from the TD
Account would be mentioned.
•
Maturity date of deposit: This tag displays the date on which TD will get matured.
For details on advice generation please refer the chapter titled ‘Maintaining Advice Formats’ in
the MS user manual under CORE module.
9.3.2 Term Deposit Rate Change Advice Format
The System needs to generate interest rate change advices for Term Deposits when the interest
rate changes as part of EOD. This advice is to be generated to intimate the customer of the rate
change a month in advance.
System generates this advice only for those term deposit accounts for the EOD branch for which
‘Generate UDE change advice’ option is checked at term deposit account booking level.
9-11
You can use the following format in generating term deposit interest rate change advice
(UDECA):
#B
Interest Component Change Advice
CUSTOMER : _CUST_
_CUST-NAME_
_ADDR1_
_ADDR2_
_ADDR3_
_ADDR4_
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------BRANCH : _BRN_
ACCOUNT : _ACC_
_DESCRIPTION_
CURRENCY : _CCY_
PRODUCT : (_PROD_) _PRODDESC_
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Rates and other interest components have been changed.The details are :
Element
Existing Value
New Value
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------#LOOP
_RCDATE_
_UDE_
_OLDVAL_
_NEWVAL_
#ENDLOOP
9-12
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------#EB
For more information on rate change advice, please refer the Maintaining Customer Accounts
chapter of this user manual.
For details on advice generation, please refer the chapter titled ‘Maintaining Advice Formats’ in
the MS user manual under CORE module.
9.3.2.1 SWIFT
You need to maintain details as shown in the screen below.
Format Text
Specify the following format.
#B
#LOOP
_LINE_
9-13
#ENDLOOP
#EB
9.3.3 Maintaining Account Class Details
You need to specify the account statement format for Savings and Nostro types of account
classes. You can invoke the ‘Account Class Maintenance’ screen by typing ‘STDACCLS’ in the
field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button.
You need to maintain the following details.
Account Type
You need to maintain two records – for one choose ‘Savings’ and for the other choose ‘Nostro’.
Account Statement Format
Choose ‘ACST_DETAILED’ for Savings type of account class and Nostro type of account class.
9.3.4 Maintaining Message Types
You can invoke the ‘Message Type Maintenance’ screen by typing ‘MSDMSTYP’ in the field at
the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button.
9-14
You need to maintain eight records with details given below.
Sr.
No
Module
Message Type
SWIFT Message
Type
Consolidation Message
Type
1
AC
ACST_BALANCE
MT941
ACST_DETAILED
2
AC
ACST_DETAILED
ACST_DETAILED
3
AC
ACST_DETAILED2
ACST_DETAILED
4
AC
ACST_DETAILED3
ACST_DETAILED
5
AC
ACST_DETAIL_VD
ACST_DETAILED
6
AC
ACST_INT_DTL
MT942
ACST_DETAILED
7
AC
MT940
MT940
ACST_DETAILED
8
AC
MT950
MT950
ACST_DETAILED
For further details, refer the chapter titled ‘Maintaining Messaging Branch Preferences’ in the
Messaging System User Manual.
9.3.4.1 Term Deposit Rollover Advice Format
You need to maintain the TD_ROLL message type or advice format for generating term deposit
rollover advice. The system generates the TD rollover advice based on the specified number of
days before the rollover date in the deposit account details screen.
Event: IMAT
The tags used in the TD Rollover Advice format are listed below:
Advice Tag
Description
_BRANCHNAME_
Branch Name
9-15
Advice Tag
Description
_BRNADD1_
Branch address line 1
_BRNADD2_
Branch address line 2
_BRNADD3_
Branch address line 3
_TDATE_
Rollover date
_REF_
Advice reference
_CUSTNAME_
Customer name
_ADD1_
Customer address line 1
_ADD2_
Customer address line 2
_ADD3_
Customer address line 3
_ADD4_
Customer address line 4
_TDACNO_
Term deposit account number
_AMT_
Rollover amount
_CCY_
Term deposit currency
_DEPTTENOR_
Term deposit tenor
_MATDATE_
Maturity date
_MATAMT_
Maturity amount
_INTRATE_
Interest rate
_INTAMT_
Projected Interest amount
_TDROLLTYPE_
Rollover type
Given below is the sample TD rollover advice format:
#RH
TERM DEPOSIT ROLLOVER ADVICE
----------------------------
9-16
DATE : _TDATE_
REFERENCE NUMBER : _REF_
#SC
_BRANCHNAME_
_BRNADD1_
_BRNADD2_
_BRNADD3_
#EC
WE ACCEPT FROM
#SC
_CUSTNAME_
_ADD1_
_ADD2_
_ADD3_
_ADD4_
#EC
9-17
#SC
A DEPOSIT ( _TDACNO_ ) OF _AMT_
MATURING ON _MATDATE_
_CCY_
. ANNUAL PERCENTAGE YEILD IS AS FOLLOWS
INTEREST RATE APPLIED FOR THE DEPOSIT TENOR _DEPTTENOR_ DAYS :
_INTRATE_%
TOTAL INTEREST AMOUNT : _INTAMT_
TOTAL MATURITY AMOUNT : _MATAMT_
TD ROllover Type
: _TDROLLTYPE_
#EC
#EH
#RF
FOR _BRANCHNAME_
AUTHORIZED SIGNATORY.
#EF
9.3.4.2 Term Deposit Maturity Advice Format
You need to maintain the TD_MAT message type or advice format for generating term deposit
maturity advice. The system generates the TD maturity advice based on the specified number of
days before the maturity date in the Deposit Account Details screen.
Event: IMATs
The tags used in the TD Maturity Advice Format are listed below:
9-18
Advice Tag
Description
_BRANCHNAME_
Branch Name
_BRNADD1_
Branch address line 1
_BRNADD2_
Branch address line 2
_BRNADD3_
Branch address line 3
_TDATE_
Rollover date
_REF_
Advice reference
_CUSTNAME_
Customer name
_ADD1_
Customer address line 1
_ADD2_
Customer address line 2
_ADD3_
Customer address line 3
_ADD4_
Customer address line 4
_TDACNO_
Term deposit account
number
_AMT_
Rollover amount
_CCY_
Term deposit currency
_DEPTTENOR_
Term deposit tenor
_MATDATE_
Maturity date
_MATAMT_
Maturity amount
_INTRATE_
Interest rate
_INTAMT_
Projected Interest amount
_TDPOTYP_
TD Payout Type
9-19
_TDPOAMT_
TD Payout Amount
_TDPOCCY_
Payout Currency
_TDOFFSETAC_
Payout offset Account
Given below is the sample TD Maturity Advice Format:
#RH
TERM DEPOSIT MATURITY ADVICE
----------------------------
DATE : _TDATE_
REFERENCE NUMBER : _REF_
#SC
_BRANCHNAME_
_BRNADD1_
_BRNADD2_
_BRNADD3_
#EC
#SC
9-20
_CUSTNAME_
_ADD1_
_ADD2_
_ADD3_
_ADD4_
#EH
#EC
#B
#SC
THE DEPOSIT ( _TDACNO_ ) OF _AMT_
IS MATURING ON _MATDATE_
_CCY_
.
INTEREST RATE APPLIED FOR THE DEPOSIT TENOR _DEPTTENOR_ DAYS :
_INTRATE_%
TOTAL INTEREST AMOUNT : _INTAMT_
TOTAL MATURITY AMOUNT : _MATAMT_
--------------------MATURITY INSTRUCTIONS
--------------------#LOOP
#IF _TDACNO_
9-21
PAYOUT TYPE
ACCOUNT
PAYOUT AMOUNT
CURRENCY
----------------------------------------------------------_TDPOTYP_
_TDOFFSETAC_
_TDPOAMT_
_TDPOCCY_
#ENDIF
#ENDLOOP
-----------------------------------------------------------
#EC
#EB
#RF
FOR _BRANCHNAME_
AUTHORIZED SIGNATORY.
#EF
9-22
OFFSET
9.3.5 Maintaining Customer Address
You can invoke the ‘Customer Address Maintenance’ screen by typing ‘MSDCUSAD’ in the field
at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button.
Here you need to maintain three records with the following details.
Sr. No
Branch
Module
Message Type
Format
1
ALL
AC
ACST_DETAILED
ACST_DETAILED
2
ALL
AC
ACST_DETAILED2
ACST_DETAILED
9-23
Sr. No
Branch
Module
Message Type
Format
3
ALL
AC
ACST_DETAILED3
ACST_DETAILED
For further details, refer the chapter titled ‘Maintaining Addresses for Customer’ in the Messaging
System User Manual.
9.3.6 Maintaining Statement Generation Preference
You can have the statement generation happen automatically as part of the automated End Of
Day cycle, using the ‘Batch EOD Function Input’ screen. You can invoke this screen by typing
‘BADEODFN’ in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the
adjoining arrow button.
You need to specify the following details.
Function Identification
Specify ‘ACSTHAND’ or select this value from the adjoining option list.
End Of Cycle Group
Choose the option ‘Transaction Input’.
9-24
For further details, refer the chapter titled ‘Automated End of Cycle Operations’ in the Automated
End of Day User Manual.
Given below is a sample account statement:
Sample account statement
9-25
9.3.7 Maintaining Ad Hoc Statement Requests
You can maintain ad hoc requests for consolidated statements raised by customers using the
‘Adhoc Consolidated Statement Request Statement’ screen. You can invoke this screen by typing
‘STDCRSMT’ in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the
adjoining arrow button.
You can capture the following details here:
Reference Number
Specify a 16-digit unique code to identify the record with. You can leave the field blank to have
the system generate it automatically upon saving the record.
Branch Code
The system displays the branch code.
Customer No
Specify a valid customer number who has raised an ad hoc request for statement. The adjoining
option list displays all valid customer numbers maintained in the system. You can select the
appropriate one.
Request Type
Select the request type from the adjoining drop-down list. The available options are:
•
Consolidated
9-26
•
CASA
•
Corporate Loans
From Date
Specify the start date of the statement.
To Date
Specify the end date of the statement.
Request Date
Specify the date on which the request is raised by the customer.
Note that ‘To Date’ must be less than or equal to ‘Request Date’.
Process Status
The system displays the status denoted by a single letter as below:
•
U: When the customer requests for the statement, this status is displayed
•
P: For statements processed successfully, this status is displayed
•
E: For statements that encounter error during processing, this status is displayed
Using the Generic Interface, you can maintain the statement format and generate the
statements.
Process Status Details
The system gives the description of the single letter Process Status displayed above.
9.3.7.1 Viewing Adhoc Consolidated Statement Request Summary
You can view a summary of adhoc consolidated statement requests using the ‘Adhoc
Consolidated Statement Request Summary’ screen.
9-27
You can invoke this screen by typing ‘STSCRSMT’ in the field at the top right corner of the
Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button.
You can query on records based on any or all of the following criteria:
•
Authorization Status
•
Record Status
•
Reference Number
•
Customer Number
•
Branch Code
•
Process Status
Click ‘Search’ button. The system identifies all records satisfying the specified criteria and
displays the following details for each one of them:
•
Authorization Status
•
Record Status
•
Reference Number
•
Customer Number
9-28
•
Branch Code
•
Request Type
•
From Date
•
To Date
•
Request Date
•
Process Date
•
Process Status
9.3.8 Maintaining Automatic Consolidated Statement Requests
You can maintain statement requests of customers who would require consolidated statements
on an automatic basis using the ‘Automatic Consolidated Request Statement Maintenance’
screen. You can invoke this screen by typing ‘STDACRST’ in the field at the top right corner of
the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button.
You can capture the following details here:
Reference Number
Specify a 16-digit unique code to identify the record with. You can leave the field blank to have
the system generate it automatically upon saving the record.
Branch Code
The system displays the branch code.
9-29
Customer No
Specify a valid customer number for whom you wish to maintain a request for automatic
consolidated statements. The adjoining option list displays all valid customer numbers maintained
in the system. You can select the appropriate one.
Effective Date
Specify the date on which the statement is requested.
Frequency
Select the frequency of the statement requested from the adjoining drop-down list. The available
options are:
•
Monthly
•
Quarterly
•
Semi Annual
•
Annually
Start Month
Select the starting month of the requested statement from the adjoining drop-down list. The
available options are:
•
January
•
February
•
March
•
April
•
May
•
June
•
July
•
August
•
September
•
October
•
November
•
December
Start On
Specify which day of the month should the statement begin from.
9-30
Last Executed Date
The system displays the date on which the statement request was last executed, if any.
9.3.8.1 Viewing Automatic Consolidated Statement Request Summary
You can view a summary of automatic consolidated statement requests using the ‘Automatic
Consolidated Request Statement Summary’ screen. You can invoke this screen by typing
‘STSACRST’ in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the
adjoining arrow button.
You can query on records based on any or all of the following criteria:
•
Authorization Status
•
Record Status
•
Reference Number
•
Branch Code
•
Customer No
Click ‘Search’ button. The system identifies all records satisfying the specified criteria and
displays the following details for each one of them:
9-31
•
Authorization Status
•
Record Status
•
Reference Number
•
Branch Code
•
Customer No
•
Effective Date
•
Frequency
•
Start Month
•
Start On
•
Last Executed Date
9-32
10. Processing Post Dated Checks
10.1 Introduction
Oracle FLEXCUBE supports processing of post dated Checks (PDCs) both at Branch and Host
levels.
PDCs have four events in their life cycle:
•
Booking (Entry) of PDCs, where details of the PDC are entered in Oracle FLEXCUBE
•
Initiation of PDCs, where the PDC is authorized and becomes active. Contingent entries,
if required, are passed for the PDC during initiation
•
Liquidation of PDCs, where the PDC becomes a normal Check to be sent through
clearing.
•
Cancellation, when the PDC is cancelled before liquidation. It is also possible to reverse
a PDC after liquidation
For processing PDCs, you will first have to create PDC products in Oracle FLEXCUBE and then
process individual PDCs as contracts under the products that you create.
10.1.1 Maintaining PDC Products
You will have to create a product for PDCs and define attributes specific to it.
You can invoke the ‘Post Dated Checks Product Definition’ screen by typing ‘PDDPRMNT’ in the
field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button.
In this screen, you can enter basic information relating to a PDC product such as Product Code,
Description, and so forth.
10-1
For any product you create in Oracle FLEXCUBE, you can define generic attributes, such as
accounting roles, events, MIS details, etc., by clicking on the appropriate icon in the horizontal
array of icons in this screen. For a post dated Checks product, in addition to these generic
attributes, you can specifically define other attributes. These attributes are discussed in detail in
this section.
You can define the attributes specific to a PDC product in the PD Product Definition Main screen
and the PDC Product Preferences screen. In these screens, you can specify the product type and
set the product preferences respectively.
For further information on the generic attributes that you can define for a product, please refer the
following Oracle FLEXCUBE User Manuals:
•
Products
•
Interest
•
Charges and Fees
•
Tax
•
User Defined Fields
•
Settlements
In the Product Definition screen, you can also enter the following:
Product Code
Specify the code for the product. This is a code for the specific PDC product that you are
creating.
Product Module
Select the module for the product you have specified from the option list.
Product Type
Select the type for the product from the option list provided. The first attribute that you define for a
product is its type. For a PDC product, the product type is PD.
Description
Select a brief description for the product from the option list provided.
Slogan
Select a slogan, or a marketing punch line, for the product.
10-2
Product Group
Select the product group to which you wish to assign the PDC product. Products can be
categorized into groups based on the common elements that they share. Associating a product
with a group will facilitate retrieval of information of a class of products at one stroke. You can
maintain Product Groups in the Product Group Definition screen, invoked from the Application
Browser.
Start Date / End Date
The period during which you wish the PDC product to be current – you specify this by entering a
Start and an End Date.
Remarks
Exchange Rate Variance particulars for any currency conversion is involved – the extent of
variance that will be allowed without requiring an override, the extent beyond which the
transaction will not be allowed, the rate code and the rate type.
10.1.2 Specifying Accounting Entries and Advices for Events
Click ‘Accounting Roles’ button to invoke the ‘Product Event Accounting Entries & Advices
Maintenance’ screen.
For PDCs, accounting entries can be maintained for the following events:
•
INIT: Contingent entries, if required, are to be maintained for INIT. Charges can also be
linked to this event
•
LIQD: Liquidation entries for the PDC, and reversal of contingent entries are to be
maintained for this event. Charges can also be associated with liquidation
•
CANL: Cancellation charges for the PDC can be maintained here. If contingent entries
have been passed, the reversal entries also need to be specified here.
Click ‘Accounting Roles’ button to invoke the ‘Accounting Roles’ screen.
10-3
The necessary accounting entries are mentioned below. Select the appropriate accounting roles,
amount tags and Debit/Credit indicators for each leg of the accounting entry.
Accounting entries for charges on PDCs:
Accounting Role / Head
Amount Tag
Dr / Cr Indicator
Internal GLs
PDC_CHARGE
Cr
Customer A/c
PDC_CUST_CHARGE
Dr
10-4
10.1.3 Specifying Product Preferences
Click ‘Preferences’ button to invoke the ‘Post Dated Checks Product Preference’ screen.
Product Code
Specify the code for the Product.
Linked Product
Select the Clearing product to be used when the product matures and the Check is sent for
outward clearing. This is only applicable to External PDCs.
Post Dated Check Type
Oracle FLEXCUBE processes the following types of PDCs :
•
Own account: PDCs issued against the customer’s account
•
External PDC: PDCs from other banks deposited in the customer’s account
•
Bank-issued PDC: PDCs issued against the bank’s Nostro accounts
Track Drawer Limits
Check this box to track the drawer limits at the PDC transaction. The Drawer limits will be tracked
at the PDC transaction only if this checkbox is checked.
Pass Contingent
Check this box if you wish contingent entries to be passed during PDC initiation. Depending on
the type of PDC, the following contingent entries should be defined:
10-5
When a customer deposits PDC into own account
Accounting Role / Head
Amount Tag
Dr / Cr Indicator
Contingent Asset
PDC_RECEV
Dr
Contingent Liability
PDC_RECEV_CONTRA
Cr
Bank Issues PDC
Accounting Role / Head
Amount Tag
Dr / Cr Indicator
Contingent Asset
PDC_ISSUE_CONTRA
Dr
Contingent Liability
PDC_ISSUE
Cr
Discount / Purchase
Check this box, to allow discounting/purchasing for the PDC instrument.
Discounting/purchasing will be allowed for the PDC instrument, only if the product is defined for
this change of operation,
Bulk Input Allowed
Check this box to indicate that this product can be used for bulk inputs. If this box is not checked,
this product is available only for single online contracts. Oracle FLEXCUBE supports bulk input of
PDCs, where a single contract is entered for multiple PDCs.
If you allow bulk input, you can indicate the default instrument number and frequency of the
PDCs. This value defaults to bulk input contracts, but can be changed while entering the bulk
input contract.
Holiday Treatment
If the liquidation event for a PDC falls on a holiday, you may wish that event to take effect either
on the previous or on the following day. Select either Backward or Forward to indicate your
preference. You may also desire that the schedule for bulk upload of PDCs gets modified
according to the holiday treatment that you specify. That is, if a particular schedule day, falling on
a holiday, is shifted backward / forward, then you may wish the subsequent schedule days also to
move
•
Forward
•
Backward by the same number of days
Accrual Frequency
Specify the frequency in which the interest components are to be collected .The frequency can be
Daily, Monthly, Quarterly, Half yearly and Annual.
10-6
Accrual start month
Specify the month when the accrual should happen, if the frequency is selected as “Quarterly” or
above.
Accrual start date
Specify the date of the month when the accrual should happen, if the frequency is selected as
“Monthly” or above.
Charge to be collected in
Specify the option for collecting the charges from the adjoining drop-down list. The available
options are:
•
Advance- The charge defined can be collected in advance.
•
Arrears- The charge defined can be collected in arrears. The overdue charge component
is always collected in arrears irrespective of preferences defined.
Frequency & Cascade Scheduling
Check the Cascade scheduling option if you wish subsequent schedule days to be recalculated
when a particular schedule day is shifted. If you do not select this option, then the original
schedule is maintained. This Check box is enabled only if you have chosen to allow bulk input of
PDCs.
PDC Realization
Select the type of PDC realization from the following options:
•
Auto- Select this option for the automatic “movement of funds to collected” as a batch on
the Customer Float day.
•
Manual- Select this option for the manual “movement of funds to collected”.
10-7
10.1.4 Entering Details of Post Dated Checks
You can invoke the ‘Post Dated Checks Transaction Input’ screen by typing ‘PDDONLIN’ in the
field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button.
Transaction Reference Number
Specify the Transaction Reference Number of the post dated Check.
Product Code
From the option list of product codes that you have created in the Product Definition screen,
specify the PDC product code that has to be used for the Check.
Remitter Account Number
This is the account which has to be debited for clearing the Check. Depending on the PDC type,
you will have to select the following values for the remitter account:
•
If the PDC type is ‘Own A/c PDC’, the remitter account should be a valid customer
account
•
If the PDC type is ‘PDC issued by the bank’, the remitter account can either be a GL or
Nostro account
•
If the PDC type is ‘External PDC’, the remitter account should be a valid GL
10-8
Beneficiary Account Number
This is the number of the account, in favor of which the PDC is drawn. If the customer draws a
PDC on his account for depositing into another account held in your bank, then you can enter the
beneficiary account number here. The beneficiary account can either be a valid customer account
or a valid GL.
Amount and Currency
From the option list, select the currency in which the PDC is denominated. Also specify the
amount of the PDC.
Value Date
Specify the date on which the PDC was deposited.
Account Number
Specify the unique loan account number linked to the PDC. The adjoining option list displays all
valid account numbers maintained in the CL, MO and LE modules in the system. You can choose
the appropriate one.
For this loan account, if the customer pays an advance instalment or makes an early settlement,
the system will delete the outstanding Checks. A report of such cancelled Checks is generated on
a daily basis.
Remarks
Specify the reason for cancellation of post dated Check.
Event Sequence Number
Specify the event sequence number for processing a post dated Check.
Source Code
External Reference Number
Specify the external reference number while processing a post dated Check.
Branch Code
Specify the code for the branch that has issued the post dated Checks.
Instrument Number
This is the PDC number. If PDC type is External, this number should be unique for the given
clearing branch & bank.
10-9
10.1.4.1
Clearing Details
In the fields provided, enter / select the:
Clearing product
Select the product that is ready for clearing.
Issuer Branch
Select the branch that is issuing the post dated Checks.
Clearing Bank
Select the bank that is clearing the post dated Checks issued.
Clearing Branch
Select the branch that is clearing the post dated Checks issued.
Sector Code
Select the code of the sector that is processing the post dated Checks,
Issuer Bank
Select the bank that is issuing the post dated Checks.
Bulk Transaction Reference Number
Specify the bulk transaction number that is used in transactions.
For detailed field explanation on End Point & Routing Number, refer to the Clearing User Manual.
The clearing details are needed only for External type PDCs.
10.1.4.2
Discount/Purchase details
Operation
Select the operation from the adjoining drop-down list. The available options are:
•
Purchase- Select this option if the Activation date is current date and when selected,
CPUR event will be fired.
•
Discount - Select this option if the Activation date is future date and when selected, the
event CDIS will be fired.
A validation will be done for the operations while saving the PDC transaction.
10-10
Amount
Specify the Purchase / discount amount. The full amount of the PDC will be the discount amount.
Check Status
Select the status of the Check from the adjoining drop-down list.
The available options are:
•
Normal – This is a normal Check which is not discounted / purchased. For this you
should choose the ‘null’ option.
•
Discounted – This status is set to Discounted, when the operation is selected as Discount
•
Purchased - This status is set to Purchased, when the operation is selected as Purchase
•
Collection – When a normal Check launched for collection (Activation of PDC)
•
Collection after Discount - When a Discounted Check launched for collection (Activation
of PDC)
•
Collection after Purchase - When a Purchased Check launched for collection (Activation
of PDC)
•
Returned – When the Check is dishonored/rejected, the status of the PDC would be
updated to ‘Returned ‘
•
Passed - When the status of the funds is marked as collected, the status of the PDC will
be updated as ‘Passed’.
•
Pullback – When the pullback operation is performed the Check status will be Pullback.
10.1.4.3
Interest Computation Dates
Select the appropriate dates for interest computation from the adjoining list.
From date
Select the date from which the interest computation has to start, from the adjoining calendar
button. These details are allowed only for the CDIS/CPUR event.
To date
Select the date till which the interest should be collected for discount, from the adjoining calendar
button .It is arrived by adding the days from the date of discounting till the activation date +
number of float days of customer value date defined in the ARC maintenance for the clearing
product defined for a PDC product.
10-11
10.1.4.4
Charge Payable Details
You need to enter the following details for the processing of charges for the PDC:
Charge Branch
Select the branch in which the charge payable account is maintained.
Status
Indicate the current status of the PDC by selecting from the following values:
•
U
: Unprocessed
•
A
: Active (Initiated)
•
V
: Reversed
•
L
: Liquidated
•
C
:Cancelled
Charge Account Number
The account which is to be debited for the charge – this is necessary for passing accounting
entries for the charge calculated for any of the events associated with a PDC.
Purpose
You have the option of specifying the purpose for which the PDC is issued. This is for information
only.
Currency
The currency in which the charge should be calculated.
Activation Date
Enter the date on which the PDC becomes a normal Check, that is, the maturity date of the PDC
or the loan linked to PDC. Therefore, this can also be viewed as the value date of the normal
Check. The value that you enter here is validated as per the holiday treatment maintained at the
PDC product level. This date should be greater than or equal the current date & less than the end
date specified for this PDC product.
Location of Check
Specify the location where the PDCs are held till activation. This is for reporting purposes only.
Actions allowed in the PDC Online screen
•
Add: Entering details of a new PDC
10-12
10.1.4.5
•
Unlock: Changing details of an unprocessed PDC. You can only modify an unauthorized
and unprocessed PDC. If, during modification, you change the amount, activation date,
currency, remitter account number or charge payable details, then the contingent entries
passed during initiation gets deleted and new entries are passed based on the
modification done.
•
Delete: Deleting a PDC prior to its first authorization
•
Reverse: Reversing a PDC that has been liquidated. Contingent entries passed for the
PDC are reversed.
•
Cancellation: Canceling a PDC that is active but has not been liquidated. The
accounting entries specified for the cancellation event are passed.
Limits Tracking
Limits Tracking required
If Limits tracking is enabled at product level then this box will be displayed as checked. This is
defaulted from the product and you are allowed to change it. For Discounted and Purchase
operations limits tracking should be checked.
Credit Line
Select the credit lines to be used for limits tracking from the adjoining option list. The credit lines
maintained in the system for the customer are listed here. The lines maintained for the customer
is fetched by the system for the beneficiary account number and is allowed only for the
CDIS/CPUR operation.
The limit will get reduced to the extent of the Check amount when the Check is discounted and if
it exceeds the limit attached, an override will be thrown on saving.
When the PDC transaction is either reversed after liquidation or cancelled before liquidation,
the limit line reduced during discounting of the Check will get update to the extent to which it was
reduced.
10.1.4.6
Viewing Charges Parameters
Charge parameters specified for a particular product default for the individual PDCs entered
under that product.
You can view these charges for individual PDCs. Click ‘Charges’ button in the ‘Post Dated
Checks Transaction Input’ screen to invoke the ‘Charge Details’ sub-screen.
10-13
10.1.5 Viewing Accounting Entries
Accounting entries and overrides specified for a particular product default for the individual PDCs
entered under that product.
You can view these for individual PDCs. Click ‘Accounting Entries’ button in the ‘Post Dated
Checks Transaction Input’ screen to invoke the ‘Accounting Entries’ sub-screen.
10-14
10.1.6 Viewing ICFF Details
Click the ‘ICCF Details button in the ‘Post Dated Checks Transaction Input’ screen to invoke the
‘ICCF Details’ screen.
The following fields are displayed here:
•
Grace Period
•
Contract Reference Number
•
Component
•
Currency
•
Event
•
Rate Type
•
Maximum Rate
10-15
•
Minimum Rate
•
Customer Margin
•
Interest Periods
•
Fixed Rate
•
Rate Code
•
Description
•
Interest Amount
•
Spread
10.1.7 Viewing Summary of Post Dated Checks Transaction
You can query, view and delete the transaction details of the post dated Checks in the ‘Post
Dated Checks Transaction Summary’ screen. You can invoke this screen by typing ‘PDSONLIN’
in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow
button.
Here, you can query on post dated Checks based on any one or all of the following criteria:
• Transaction Reference Number
• Branch Code
10-16
• Instrument Number
• Account Number
• Product Code
• Remitter Account Number
• Issuer Bank
Click ‘Search’ button. The system identifies all records satisfying the specified criteria and
displays the following details for each one of them:
• Transaction Reference Number
• Event Sequence Number
• Source Code
• External Reference
• Product Code
• Branch Code
• Remitter Account Number
10.1.8 Bulk Input of Post Dated Checks
Oracle FLEXCUBE allows bulk inputs of PDCs with different due dates, provided the Checks
have the same amount and are drawn on the same account.
You can invoke the ‘Post Dated Checks Bulk Input’ screen by typing ‘PDDBULKI’ in the field at
the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button.
10-17
The fields in this screen are the same as those in the ‘Post Dated Checks Transaction Input’
screen mentioned above. Additionally, you have to specify the number of instruments, the
instrument number frequency and the activation date frequency, i.e., the frequency with which the
PDCs fall due - in days, months and years.
Check in Series
Check this box to enable bulk input of post dated Checks. If this box is not checked, you have to
enter the individual details of the Check for the same clearing product and currency.
Bulk Input Details
You can input bulk number of Checks even if it is drawn on different accounts and different
amounts here.
The following details are captured here:
Operation
Select the operation from the adjoining drop-down list. The available options are:
•
Purchase- Select this option if the Activation date is current date and when selected,
CPUR event will be fired.
10-18
•
Discount - Select this option if the Activation date is future date and when selected, the
event CDIS will be fired.
A validation will be done for the operations while saving the PDC transaction
Beneficiary Account Number
Specify the account, in favor of which the PDC is drawn. If the customer draws a PDC on his
account for depositing into another account held in your bank, then you can enter the beneficiary
account here. The beneficiary account can either be a valid customer account or a valid GL.
Instrument Number
Specify the PDC number. If PDC type is External, this number should be unique for the given
clearing branch & bank.
Amount
Specify the amount of the PDC.
Account Number
Specify the loan account number linked to the PDC. The adjoining option list displays all valid
account numbers maintained in CL, MO and LE modules of Oracle FLEXCUBE. You can choose
the appropriate one.
For this loan account, if the customer pays an advance instalment or makes an early settlement,
the system will delete the outstanding Checks. A report of such cancelled Checks is generated on
a daily basis.
Remarks
Specify the reason for cancellation of post dated Check.
DP amount
Specify the discount amount. The full amount of the PDC will be the discount amount.
Issuer Bank
Specify the name of the bank of the issuer.
Issuer Branch
Select the branch that is issuing the post dated Checks.
Activation Date
Specify the date of activation of PDC.
10-19
Purpose
Specify the purpose for which the PDC is issued. This is for information only.
Location of Check
Specify the location where the PDCs are held till activation. This is for reporting purposes only.
Charge Branch
Select the branch in which the charge payable account is maintained.
Charge Account Number
The account which is to be debited for the charge – this is necessary for passing accounting
entries for the charge calculated for any of the events associated with a PDC.
Charge Currency
Specify the currency in which the charge should be calculated.
If you enter the fields, instrument number frequency, no of entries for a bulk input where the
check in series flag is not selected, an error would be thrown on saving.
You will be able to upload bulk Check transactions using file upload.
Once you have entered all the details and saved the contract, individual PDC contracts are
created based on the activation date and instrument number frequency you have specified for the
bulk input. The individual contracts become active when you authorize the bulk input, and can be
viewed through the PDC contract online screen.
The actions allowed in this screen are Add and Delete. Delete is allowed only before
authorization. Other actions are performed on individual PDCs through the PDC Online screen as
explained above.
Viewing Summary of Post Dated Checks Bulk Input
You can query, view and delete the transaction details of the post dated Checks bulk inputs in the
‘Post Dated Checks Bulk Input Summary’ screen. You can invoke this screen by typing
‘PDSBULKI’ in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining
arrow button.
10-20
Here, you can query on post dated Checks transaction details based on any one or all of the
following criteria:
• Authorization Status
• Transaction Reference Number
• Record Status
• Account Number
Account Number
Specify the unique account number that should be queried. The adjoining option list displays all
valid account numbers of the CL, MO and LE maintained in the system. You can choose the
appropriate one.
Click ‘Search’ button. The system identifies all records satisfying the specified criteria and
displays the following details for each one of them.
• Authorization Status
• Record Status
• Transaction Reference Number
• Sector Code
• External Reference
• Number of Entries
• Product Code
10-21
• Branch Code
• Remitter Account Number
• Beneficiary Account Number
• Instrument Number
• Currency
• Issuer Bank
• Issuer Branch
• Charge Branch
• Charge Account Number
• Charge Currency
• Account Number
• Remarks
10.1.9 Processing of PDCs that you have entered
Oracle FLEXCUBE initiates unprocessed PDCs as per product definition on authorization. The
status for the PDCs is set to Initiated and contingent entries are passed.
10.1.10
Liquidation of PDCs
PDCs that have reached or are past their activation date are liquidated as part of beginning-ofday batch process in Oracle FLEXCUBE. For PDCs with Initiated status, the system performs the
following actions on liquidation:
•
Reverse contingent entries if any were passed
•
Update status to Liquidated
•
Log the instrument with Clearing, if necessary
•
Call Accounts Rates Charge (ARC) upload to create a Check deposit transaction as per
the ARC product set up for the PDC.
•
Failed transactions are logged as exceptions
An active PDC can also be manually liquidated, on or after its activation date. To manually
liquidate a PDC, select ‘Liquidate’ from the Actions menu in the Application toolbar or click
liquidate icon.
10.1.11
Cancellation and Reversal of PDCs
An active PDC can be cancelled before liquidation. To cancel the PDC, click Reverse button in
the PDC contract screen. On cancellation, the accounting entries you defined for the CANL event
are passed.
10-22
After the PDC has been liquidated, you also have the option to reverse it, by selecting ‘Reverse’
from the Actions menu in the Application toolbar or clicking reverse icon. All accounting entries
passed for the PDC will be reversed.
Oracle FLEXCUBE cancels the outstanding PDCs that are linked to loan after the prepayment of
the loan. If you want to cancel the PDC after the partial prepayment, you will have to cancel
manually through the ‘Post Dated Check Transaction Input’ screen. If you want to reverse the
prepayment and authorization, you will have to manually link the cancelled loan payment through
‘Post Dated Check Transaction Input’ screen.
The system will generate advices when the PDC is cancelled. This advice contains the
message type ‘PD_PDC_CAN’ with ‘PD’ module.
10.1.12
Manual Realization of PDCs
There are two possible ways of PDC realization based on the product setup:
•
Auto Realization
•
Manual Realization – For early/late realization
You can invoke the ‘Post Dated Checks Manual Realization’ screen by typing ‘PDDMANLQ’ in
the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow
button.
10-23
PDC Manual Realization is query screen where you can enter the ‘Reference number’ of the
clearing transaction.
You can initiate the movement of funds to collect manually and can enter the ‘Reference number’
of the clearing transaction.
Transaction Reference Number
Specify the Transaction Reference Number of the post dated Check.
Product Code
From the option list of product codes that you have created in the Product Definition screen,
specify the PDC product code that has to be used for the Check.
10-24
Remitter Account Number
This is the account which has to be debited for clearing the Check. Depending on the PDC type,
you can select the following values for the remitter account:
•
If the PDC type is ‘Own A/c PDC’, the remitter account should be a valid customer
account
•
If the PDC type is ‘PDC issued by the bank’, the remitter account can either be a GL or
Nostro account
•
If the PDC type is ‘External PDC’, the remitter account should be a valid GL
Beneficiary Account Number
This is the number of the account, in favor of which the PDC is drawn. If the customer draws a
PDC on his account for depositing into another account held in your bank, then you can enter the
beneficiary account number here. The beneficiary account can either be a valid customer account
or a valid GL.
Amount and Currency
From the option list, select the currency in which the PDC is denominated. Also specify the
amount of the PDC.
Value Date
Specify the date on which the PDC was deposited.
Loan Account Number
Specify the unique loan account number. The adjoining option list displays all valid account
numbers of the CL, MO and LE maintained in the system. You can choose the appropriate one.
Remarks
Specify the explanation for the cancellation of post dated Check.
Event Sequence Number
Specify the event sequence number for processing a post dated Check.
Source Code
Specify the source code for processing a post dated Check.
External Reference Number
Specify the external reference number while processing a post dated Check.
Branch Code
Specify the code for the branch that has issued the post dated Checks.
10-25
Instrument Number
This is the PDC number. If PDC type is External, this number should be unique for the given
clearing branch & bank.
10.1.12.1
Clearing Details
In the fields provided, enter / select the:
Clearing product
Select the product that is ready for clearing.
Issuer Branch
Select the branch that is issuing the post dated Checks.
Clearing Bank
Select the bank that is clearing the post dated Checks issued.
Clearing Branch
Select the branch that is clearing the post dated Checks issued.
Sector Code
Select the code of the sector that is processing the post dated Checks,
Issuer Bank
Select the bank that is issuing the post dated Checks.
Bulk Transaction Reference Number
Specify the bulk transaction number that is used in transactions.
For detailed field explanation on End Point & Routing Number, refer to the Clearing User Manual.
The clearing details are needed only for External type PDCs.
10.1.12.2
Charge Payable Details
You need to enter the following details for the processing of charges for the PDC:
Charge Branch
Select the branch in which the charge payable account is maintained.
10-26
Status
Indicate the current status of the PDC by selecting from the following values:
•
U - Unprocessed
•
A - Active (Initiated)
•
V - Reversed
•
L - Liquidated
•
C - Cancelled
Charge Account Number
The account which is to be debited for the charge – this is necessary for passing accounting
entries for the charge calculated for any of the events associated with a PDC.
Purpose
You have the option of specifying the purpose for which the PDC is issued. This is for information
only.
Currency
Specify the currency in which the charge should be calculated.
Move funds to be collected
Check this box to trigger the realization of funds to customer account manually.
Check this box only when the funds are not in collected stage and when the Check status is not
rejected. Checking this field in any other scenarios, will throw an error while saving.
Also if you enter the fields, instrument number frequency, no of entries for a bulk input where the
check in series box is not selected, an error will be thrown while saving.
The following operations are also allowed for this screen after the query operation.
•
•
Unlock
•
Save
•
Authorization
Unlock: Changing details of an unprocessed PDC. You can only modify an unauthorized and
unprocessed PDC. If, during modification, you change the amount, activation date, currency,
remitter account number or charge payable details, then the contingent entries passed during
initiation gets deleted and new entries are passed based on the modification done.
10-27
10.1.13
Events and Accounting Roles
For the Booking of Check Discounting, an event CDIS is triggered and for booking of Check
Purchase, an event CPUR is triggered.
An event PULL will be triggered for pullback processing. When the customer opts for pullback of
the Check, the Check transaction will be cancelled and pullback charges are applied. The
“Reverse” operation can be used to perform the pullback process.
10.1.13.1
Discounted Check, Advance Charge collection, with Accrual
Event: CDIS
Check discounted
PD_TAG
Dr
Customer
PD_TAG
Cr
Customer
<Interest comp>_LIQD
Dr
RIA
<Interest comp>_LIQD
Cr
Event: PULL
CHECK DISCOUNTING
PD_TAG
Cr
Customer
PD_TAG
Dr
Income
<Interest comp> _LIQD
Cr
Customer
<Interest comp> _LIQD
Cr
PDC_ISSUE
PD_TAG
Cr
PDC_ISSUE_CONTR
PD_TAG
Dr
Customer
PD_CHG_TAG
Dr
PD_PULLINC
PD_CHG_TAG
Cr
Event: RETN
Customer
PD_TAG
Dr
10-28
Customer
PD_TAG
Dr
Check discounted
PD_TAG
Cr
RIA
<interest comp>_Adj
Dr
Income
<interest comp>_Adj
Cr
Event: ACCR
RIA
<Interest comp> _ACCR
Dr
Income
<Interest comp> _ACCR
Cr
10.1.13.2
Discounted, Advance charge collection, without Accrual
Event: CDIS
Check discounted
PD_TAG
Dr
Customer
PD_TAG
Cr
Customer
<Interest comp>_LIQD
Dr
RIA
<Interest comp>_LIQD
Cr
Event: PULL
Check discounted
PD_TAG
Cr
Customer
PD_TAG
Dr
RIA
<interest comp>_Ref
Dr
Customer
<interest comp>_Ref
Cr
10-29
Check discounted
PD_TAG
Cr
Customer
PD_CHG_TAG
Dr
RIA
<interest comp>_LIQD
Dr
PD_PULLINC
PD_CHG_TAG
Cr
PDC_ISSUE
PD_TAG
Cr
PDC_ISSUE_CONTR
PD_TAG
Dr
Income
<interest comp>_LIQD
Cr
RIA
<interest comp>_LIQD
Dr
Event: RETN
Customer
PD_TAG
Dr
Check discounted
PD_TAG
Cr
RIA
<interest comp>_LIQD
Dr
Income
<interest comp>_LIQD
Cr
Event: RADJ
RIA
<Interest comp> _LIQD
Dr
Income
<Interest comp> _LIQD
Cr
10-30
10.1.13.3
Discounted, Arrear charge collection, with Accrual
Event: CDIS
Check discounted
PD_TAG
Dr
Customer
PD_TAG
Cr
Event: PULL
CHECK DISCOUNTING
PD_TAG
CR
Customer
PD_TAG
DR
Income
<Interest comp> _LIQD
CR
Customer
<Interest comp> _LIQD
CR
PDC_ISSUE
PD_TAG
CR
PDC_ISSUE_CONTR
PD_TAG
DR
Customer
PD_CHG_TAG
DR
PD_PULLINC
PD_CHG_TAG
CR
10-31
Event: RETN
Customer
PD_TAG
Dr
Check discounted
PD_TAG
Cr
Customer
<Interest comp> _LIQD
Dr
Interest Receivable
<Interest comp> _LIQD
Cr
Event: ACCR
Income
<Interest comp> _ACCR
Dr
Interest Receivable
<Interest comp> _ACCR
Dr
Event: RADJ
Customer
<Interest comp> _LIQD
Dr
Interest Receivable
<Interest comp> _LIQD
Cr
10.1.13.4
Discounted, Arrear charge collection, without Accrual
Event: CDIS
Check Discounted
PD_TAG
Dr
Customer
PD_TAG
Cr
10-32
Event: PULL
CHECK DISCOUNTING
PD_TAG
Cr
Customer
PD_TAG
Dr
Income
<Interest comp> _LIQD
CR
Customer
<Interest comp> _LIQD
CR
PDC_ISSUE
PD_TAG
CR
PDC_ISSUE_CONTR
PD_TAG
DR
Customer
PD_CHG_TAG
DR
PD_PULLINC
PD_CHG_TAG
CR
Event: RETN
Customer
PD_TAG
Dr
Check discounted
PD_TAG
Cr
Customer
<Interest comp> _LIQD
Dr
Income
<Interest comp> _LIQD
Cr
Event: RADJ
Customer
<Interest comp> _LIQD
Dr
Income
<Interest comp> _LIQD
Cr
10-33
10.1.14
Purchase
Event: CPUR
Check Discounted
PD_TAG
Dr
Customer
PD_TAG
Cr
Event: RETN
Customer
PD_TAG
Dr
Check discounted
PD_TAG
Cr
Event: RADJ
Customer
<Charge comp> _LIQD
Dr
<Charge_comp>_REC
<Charge comp> _LIQD
Cr
10-34
11. Instrument Details
11.1 Introduction
Instrument transactions entered through an Oracle FLEXCUBE branch are stored in the host
Oracle FLEXCUBE database through the Instrument details screen.
The Instruments module of Oracle FLEXCUBE provides for the maintenance of appropriate
reference information, which would enable entry of instrument transactions from an Oracle
FLEXCUBE, and also enable you to view and enrich transactions that have been entered through
a Branch.
The accounting and charges details for combinations of product, customer, branch and currency,
that will be applicable for instruments transactions, must be maintained in the host Oracle
FLEXCUBE installation, through the ARC Maintenance.
11.2 Maintaining the Details of the Instrument
As part of the instrument type maintenance, you have to maintain a list of currencies, branches
and DAO GL for an instrument type.
11-1
You can invoke the ‘Instrument Product Maintenance’ screen by typing ‘DDDPRMNT’ in the field
at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button.
11.2.1.1
Entering the Details
In this screen you can enter certain basic details of the instrument. They are:
•
The instrument type
•
A description of the instrument
•
The other preferences which include:
•
¾
Whether auto authorization is allowed for the instrument type
¾
Whether you need a print of the instrument details as and when the details are
entered and authorized.
¾
Whether online authorization is allowed for the instrument
¾
Whether the instrument type allows to create demand drafts payable at other banks.
The expiry frequency of the instrument - in days, months or years
11-2
•
The advice format applicable under this instrument type
•
The status of the instrument and the product codes associated with the same
•
The currency in which the dd is being issued
•
The dao branch where the dd is being issued from
•
The dao account which will get credited for the dd issued as per the currency and dao
branch.
•
The payable limit indicates the limit for the issuing an instrument for the bank. You can
set a limit for each instrument type. All the instruments (under the instrument type) issued
by your bank should be within the specified limit. In case the instrument issued for the
issuer bank exceeds this limit, the system will prompt for an authorization.
The various products selected against the various statuses should have maintenance in ARC
except for statuses like ‘Expired’ or ‘Reissue’.
11.2.2 Maintaining Instrument Types for Outward Clearing Checks
When you maintain instrument types for processing outward clearing Checks, you need to ensure
that:
•
You have maintained the clearing products that would be used for processing the
Registration (INIT) and Liquidation (LIQD) events.
•
In the Demand Drafts Details screen, you must associate the statuses used for
registration and liquidation with the appropriate product codes. Assume, you have
maintained the products CGOC (Registration of Outward Clearing Checks) and DDLQ
(Liquidation of Outward Clearing Checks). You need to associate the status INIT
(Registration) with the product CGOC and LIQD (Liquidation) with the product DDLQ.
•
The Clearing Required option has not been enabled for the product maintained for the
liquidation event.
11.3 Maintaining Instrument Types for Other Banks
For maintaining instruments types on behalf of other banks, invoke the Banker Checks/Demand
Drafts – Issuer Banks Details screen from the Application Browser.
11.3.1.1
Entering the Details
In this screen you can enter certain basic details of the instrument. They are:
•
The Bank Code and the description of the bank
•
The Currency in which the instrument is being issued
•
The instrument type
•
The DAO (Draft Advice Outstanding) branch where the instrument is being issued from.
11-3
•
The DAO account which will get credited for the instrument issued as per the currency
and DAO branch.
•
The parameters for the instruments issued by another bank:
¾
The code for the branch issuing the instrument
¾
The description for the branch
¾
The DAO branch where the instrument is being issued from
¾
The DAO account which will get credited for the instrument issued as per the
currency and DAO branch.
¾
The payable limit for the instrument issued on behalf of another bank. You can set a
limit for each instrument type. Any instrument of this type, which has denomination
above this limit, will be rejected by the system.
11.4 Entering Instruments Transactions
You can initiate instruments transactions in the ‘Instruments Transaction Query’ screen.
You can invoke the ‘Instruments Transaction Query’ screen by typing ‘DDDQUERY’ in the field at
the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button.
In this screen, the following details get specified for each instrument transaction that you initiate
or gets initiated:
•
The type of the instrument that the system will use for processing the transaction
11-4
•
The status of the instrument: This is defaulted to Active on entering a fresh contract. The
status of an Active authorized contract can be changed to
Cancelled/Refunded/Lost/Stopped only by unlocking and modifying the record. The
status of a Lost contract can be changed to Re-issue. Apart from these, you cannot
reverse a Status. The status of a contract can change to any one of the multiple options
provided including Expired, Liquidated (from the same screen) and Reissue (through use
of the Copy option in the toolbar/menu).
¾
•
Reinstate Status: A draft can be moved into the Reinstate status only from the Stop
status. This status is same as Init, minus the accounting entries associated with Init.
A draft in stop status can be marked as Reinstated or Refunded or Re-issued. A draft
in reinstated status cannot move directly to refund or re-issue status. It has to go
through a STOP status like Init
A Reinstated draft can be changed to the following statuses :
¾
Cancelled
¾
Refund
¾
Lost
¾
Reinstated
¾
Stopped
•
To mark a draft as STOP, it needs to be replaced. The old draft details have to be copied
onto a new draft. The old draft number can be specified in the field ‘Original Draft
Number’. Upon this, Oracle FLEXCUBE will first move the original instrument into
‘Cancelled’ status. This will reverse the draft issue entries. The old draft will then be
marked as Reissued which will be achieved through appropriate maintenance of the
products in DD status maintenance and its accounting entries in ARC maintenance.
•
When a draft in Stop status is copied you can Reissue it. An override will ask you
whether the copied draft needs to be reissued.
Specifying Instrument Number
This number will be the least number available from unused instruments. This is self populated
from the instrument type maintenance and you will not be allowed to override the number.
•
An external reference, if any, for the transaction (for transactions entered from the
Branch, this number is obtained by the system).
•
Branch Code: This is defaulted to the current branch
•
The DD. MICR number of the instrument – this has to be entered
•
The instrument sequence number: This is automatically generated by the system.
•
Instrument Date: The date of issue of the instrument. This date is defaulted to the system
date but can be changed to any future date. You cannot enter back dated contracts.
•
The Instrument amount being paid, through each instrument
•
The currency in which the instrument amount is expressed
•
Payable bank specified in the instrument
•
Payable Branch the instrument is issued against
11-5
•
Remitter: Specify the name of the remitter or the third party. The country location of the
remitter also needs to be specified.
The country information is captured to enable Mantas to analyze the transactions for possible
money laundering activities.
For more details on Mantas, refer 'Mantas' interface document.
•
The Branch, Account number and currency of the account that is being debited for
making the payment towards the instrument. The account number is a customer account
number if the payment is made by a debit to the remitter’s account. It is the number of a
clearing account / GL if payment is made through Check or other GL for cash payments.
•
The Expiry Date of the instrument transaction: This is defaulted as the instrument date +
the tenor as defined for the instrument type. You can change this date.
•
Exchange Rate: If the account currency is different from the currency in which the
instrument amount is expressed, you can specify the exchange rate that will be used, in
the Exchange Rate field. The exchange rate maintained for the two currencies is
defaulted – you can change it.
•
SSN: this is the social security number which is displayed (if maintained) on selecting the
remitter. If not maintained, this has to be entered here.
•
Reissued : Check the box if the instrument is being reissued for some reason
•
Reissued Draft No: Specify the draft number for the instrument that is reissued
•
The Original Draft Number: This is populated with the instrument number of the contract
that is re-issued
•
Reissue remarks can be the reason due to which the instrument is being reissued
Tanked Transaction
The system checks this option when the Branch ‘Available’ status is ‘No’ or when the branch date
is ahead of the host date. Accordingly accounting entries are passed with the tanked status.
The transaction status of the ‘Instrument Transaction’ is changed to ‘Active’ when the branch
‘Available’ status is changed to ‘Yes’. And the tanked accounting entries if any will be un-tanked
and released.
You can process the reversal of Instrument Transaction in the same way as tanking the
transaction.
Specifying beneficiary details
You must also specify the details of the instrument for the transaction. These include beneficiary
name and beneficiary’s address. It is mandatory to enter the beneficiary’s name.
Country
Specify the country of the beneficiary. This adjoining option list displays all valid country codes
maintained in the system. You can choose the appropriate one.
11-6
Specifying the additional identifier details
You may capture the additional identifier details. This includes the Name and Value.
Adding a narrative
You can specify an appropriate narrative for the transaction in this field. This narrative is used in
the account statement generated for the customer account.
Maintaining clearing details
Click ‘Clearing’ button to invoke the ‘Clearing Transaction Input Detail’ screen, where you can
capture the details for the outward clearing instrument.
The information you capture in this screen is required to route outward clearing transactions to
the appropriate clearing house.
In this screen, you have to capture the following information for clearing:
11-7
•
The End Point
•
The Bank Code
•
The Branch Code (as identified in the network)
•
The Sector to which it belongs
•
Whether Reg CC is applicable
•
Whether special Check is governed by the Reg CC schedules
•
Whether late clearing is required
•
The reason for rejection
Depending on your Bank Code, Branch Code and Sector Code combination, the system displays
the Routing Number, Bank Value Date and the Customer Value Date.
After you maintain the above details for clearing, click ‘Exit’ or ‘Cancel’ button to return back to
the Instrument Type Details screen.
11.4.1 Viewing the Accounting Entries
To view the accounting entries and overrides for the transaction, click ‘Accounting Entries’ button
in the Instrument Type Detail screen. The Accounting Entries and Overrides screen is opened.
Any overrides that occurred when each transaction was passed are also displayed.
11.4.2 Charges for the Instrument
The charges that you have specified for the instrument, branch and currency combination that
you have chosen for the transaction, in the ARC Maintenance, are applied by default.
Click on the ‘Charges’ tab in the main ‘Instruments Transaction Query’ screen to view the
charges.
11-8
The following details are displayed in this screen, based on the ARC record for the instrument,
branch and currency chosen for the transaction:
•
The charge account (typically the income account) specified in the charges section of the
ARC Maintenance.
•
The details of the charge such as currency and the transaction code used to post charge
entries, and whether netting is required. The amount of the charge is computed by the
system and displayed. You can choose to alter the charge amount here.
11.4.3 Liquidating the Drafts
You can liquidate the drafts issued at any branch and payable at your branch. You can invoke the
‘Instruments Transaction Query’ screen by typing ‘DDDQUERY’ in the field at the top right corner
of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button.
11-9
Only contracts with Active status and payable at your branch will be available for Liquidation. The
liquidation product code (as maintained in ARC) should be selected. The beneficiary account
details are defaulted from ARC (if maintained) or have to be entered in the fields available for the
same. Charges are defaulted from ARC and can be modified. Liquidation option should be
selected from the toolbar /menu to activate liquidation process.
11.4.4 Charges for the Instrument
The charges that you have specified in the ARC Maintenance for the instrument, branch and
currency combination for the transaction are applied by default.
11-10
Click the ‘Charges’ tab in the main ‘Instruments Transaction Query’ screen to view the charges.
The following details are displayed in this screen, based on the ARC record for the instrument,
branch and currency combination chosen for the transaction:
•
The charge account (typically the income account) that you have specified in the charges
section of the ARC Maintenance.
•
The details of the charge, such as currency and the transaction code, used to post
charge entries, and whether netting is required. The amount of the charge is computed
by the system and displayed. You can choose to alter the charge amount here.
11.4.5 Processing Outward Clearing Instruments
When you liquidate outward clearing instruments, you need to enter the following details:
•
The charges being collected on behalf of the collecting bank
•
The collection bank accounts
You only need to specify these details if your bank is collecting charges on an outward clearing
instrument on behalf of the collecting bank, as specified in the ARC Maintenance.
11.5 Exempting Tax on Interest Earned on Deposit Accounts
Deposit Interest Retention Tax (DIRT) is payable on interest on deposit accounts. Customers
belonging to certain customer categories – for example, charities and non-residents – can be
exempt from paying DIRT.
11-11
Refer to the user manual for the Tax sub-system for details on exempting interest earned on
Current and Savings accounts from DIRT.
11-12
12. Annual Percentage Yield for Savings/Checking
Accounts
12.1 Introduction
Oracle FLEXCUBE allows you to calculate the Annual Percentage Yield (APY) on customer
accounts and display the APY on account statements, so as to enable your customer to compare
interest rates offered by different banks.
In order to enable the system to compute APY on Savings/Checking accounts, you need to
maintain:
•
The ‘APY Required’ option in the ‘Account Class Maintenance’ screen
•
The Feature ID ‘APY’; in the ‘Feature ID Maintenance’ screen
•
A booked formula for APY as part of the interest formula in the Interest and Charges rule
used. It must be remembered that only one APY formula may be maintained for an
interest rule.
•
The principal for the IC Rule as an element (SDE) in the ‘Interest Statement
Maintenance’ screen
•
In the Regulation Parameters Maintenance screen, specify the booked APY formula
defined involving the interest formula in the interest rule for the product as an APY type
formula.
•
The account statement generation batch after the IC batch
•
The basis (average balance or daily balance) upon which the APY must be calculated.
12-1
13. Instrument Type Maintenance and Consolidated
Check Printing
13.1 Introduction
Your bank may issue Checks to customers from the nostro accounts maintained with other
banks. To facilitate this, you need to maintain the details of all the Check books issued by those
banks/institutions to your bank in Oracle FLEXCUBE. Apart from these your bank would be
issuing other instruments such as Drafts, DDs, MCKs and so forth, which also need to be
maintained in Oracle FLEXCUBE. Each instrument type is identified by a unique instrument type
code, which can be captured in Oracle FLEXCUBE.
Further, depending on the number of leaves and the book number, the system automatically
generates the serial number for all the Check leaves associated with the book for a particular
instrument type. You can view these numbers and the status of the Check s in the ‘Status of
Check’ screen. You are also allowed to change the status of a Check if a Check is cancelled.
You can settle a contract by associating an instrument type (example: Check s drawn on nostro
accounts, DDs, MCKs etc.) with the settlement instruction. Multiple deals can be settled with a
single Check if the same counter party, module and instrument type is associated with the
settlement instructions for the deals.
13.1.1 Defining Instrument Types
You can define the various instrument types with the relevant details in the ‘Instrument Type
Maintenance’ screen.
You can invoke the ‘Instrument Type Maintenance’ screen by typing ‘ISDINSMS’ in the field at the
top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button.
You can view the details of all the existing instrument types from the summary screen.
13-1
You need to maintain the following details for an instrument type:
Instrument Type
Specify a name for the instrument type that you are defining. There will a list of values for the
instrument type that will show all the instrument types from the DD status maintenance screen.
Instrument number is picked from the Instrument type level.
Branch Code
Indicate the name of the branch to which the Check book is issued. All the branches maintained
in Oracle FLEXCUBE are displayed in an option list. Select the branch code from the option list.
Account No
This is the nostro account maintained with other banks. If this Account is involved in a deal
settlement, the type of instrument associated with the account will be defaulted in the ‘Instrument
Type’ field of the ‘Settlement Message Details’ screen (invoked from the Contract Online screen
of a front-end module).
You can associate a settlement account with one instrument type only.
The branch in which the nostro account resides is defaulted on selection of the account number.
If you select a GL, the current branch is defaulted.
No of Leaves
Specify the total number of Check leaves in the Check Book you are defining.
Check Book No
This is the number of the Check Book maintained for the Instrument Type. These numbers will be
unique for a specific branch and instrument type.
Lpad Required
The user has an option to specify whether the instrument numbers have to be left padded with
zeroes. If you enable this option, the instrument numbers will be prefixed by zeroes. By clicking
‘Status’ button you can view the status of each instrument.
Ft Upload
As discussed earlier, Oracle FLEXCUBE offers you the facility to print a consolidated Check for a
counterparty, module and instrument type combination.
If you choose to print a consolidated Check, you are also required to keep a track of the individual
amounts that have contributed towards the consolidated Check. You can do a Ft upload to
achieve this. When the upload is run, the suspense GL is debited for the consolidated amount to
credit the miscellaneous GL (Ft Upload Account – discussed later). Internally, the system
provides the break up of the consolidated amount.
13-2
The Ft Upload function is run after the consolidated Check is printed. You can configure the
upload function to be run as part of the EOD process.
Only on selection of the FT Upload option, the following fields are enabled:
FT Upload Product
You can associate an Outgoing Ft product to all the transactions that need to be uploaded. When
the upload function is run at EOD, the system creates a corresponding Ft Contract Reference
Number for each transaction and stores it internally. Therefore, all the uploaded contracts will be
identified by the Ft Cont Ref No in addition to the original Cont Ref No.
If you reverse the original contract, the system displays the corresponding Ft contract reference
numbers also. You have to reverse the Ft Contract Ref nos. manually.
If a Check has already been printed, you are required to cancel the Check manually, save and
authorize the cancellation and then proceed with reversal.
FT Upload Account
This is the miscellaneous GL that is credited with the consolidated Check amount when an Ft
upload occurs. The suspense GL (Account associated with the instrument type) is debited for this
amount.
On selection of the account, the branch in which the account resides gets defaulted. If you select
a GL, the current branch gets defaulted.
After you save and authorize the record, the system automatically generates the Check leaf
numbers based on the Check book number and the total number of Check leaves you have
defined for the book. The system also maintains the status of each leaf in the book.
13.1.2 Viewing the Check Leaf Number and Status
Click ‘Status’ button in the ‘Instrument Type Maintenance’ screen to invoke the ‘Status of Check’
screen.
13-3
In this screen, you will see the individual Check numbers and Check status. By default the status
of a Check is ‘Not Used’.
The operation you perform on a Check book effects the corresponding Check leaves also. For
instance, if you choose to close a Check book, the status of the Check leaves is also
automatically updated to ‘Cancelled’. On reopening the Check book, the status becomes ‘Not
Used’ again.
13.1.3 Defining Check Details
After the Check book is saved and authorized, you can view the details of the individual Check
leaves in the ‘Instrument Type Leaf Maintenance’ screen. You can invoke this screen by double
clicking on a record in the ‘Status of Check’ screen. Navigate to the desired Check book number,
by using the previous and next arrow buttons in the toolbar. The following operations are not
allowed:
•
Creating a new record
•
Copying a record
•
Deleting a record
•
Reopening a record
•
Closing a record
The Messaging Subsystem of Oracle FLEXCUBE populates the following details whenever a
Check is printed:
•
Amount for which the Check is drawn
•
Currency of the amount
•
Beneficiary of the Check Date for which the Check was issued
•
Date on which the Check was printed
13-4
You cannot change any of the above details. However, you are allowed to change the status of a
Check. Select ‘Modify’ from the Actions Menu in the Application toolbar or click unlock icon to
make the changes.
The status of Check is modified through the ‘Change Instrument Status’ screen. Click ‘Change
Status To’ button to display this screen.
You will be allowed only the following status changes:
•
A ‘Used’ status to a ‘Cancelled’ status
•
A ‘Not Used’ status to a ‘Cancelled’ status
You cannot change the status of a ‘Cancelled’ Check.
13.1.4 FT Upload
You can configure Ft upload function to be run as part of the EOD operations.
You can invoke the ‘Instrument Type Maintenance’ screen by typing ‘ISDINSMS’ in the field at the
top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button.
All the consolidated Check s that are printed and for which the Ft Upload option is selected, get
uploaded when this process is run. Click ’Exit’ or ‘Cancel’ button to execute the upload process.
The system generates an Ft Contract Ref No. for each transaction contributing towards the
consolidated Check amount and credits the Ft Upload Account with each amount individually,
thus keeping a track of all such transactions.
13.1.5 Associating an Instrument Type with a Settlement Instruction
If the settlement account of a settlement instruction is the nostro with another bank, the
settlement instruction is automatically associated with the instrument type associated with the
nostro. It is displayed in the ‘Instrument Type’ field of the ‘Settlement Message Details’ screen.
You can also select a different instrument type from the option list provided.
13-5
The instrument type will get defaulted only if you associate the liquidating event with the
advice tag PAYMENT _MESSAGE.
13.1.6 MT110 and MT111 Generation
MT110 and MT111 will be generated from Instruments module.
•
MT110 is generated whenever a foreign currency draft is issued from Instruments module
and the message is sent to the bank on which the draft is drawn.
•
MT111 is generated whenever a foreign currency draft is marked for stop payment and is
sent to the bank where the draft is payable
Processing MT110 and MT111
Message type DD_ISSUE will be used to generate MT110 and DD_STOP_PMNT for MT111.
You can link these message types to products in the DD status maintenance. In the DD status
maintenance these message types will be input across the INIT and the STOP statuses. If
DD_ISSUE is linked to an INIT product the existing message DEMDRAFT also will get printed
along with MT110. Since this messages are going to be generated only for DD’s issued in
currencies other that USD and CAD separate instrument type has to be maintained for issuing
DD’s in other currency. This is because the message and product linkage is in the DD status
maintenance. The receiver of the message will be the BIC code for the customer of the NOSTRO
account / Credit Account.
The receiver will be obtained in the following way.
•
The credit account specified as the DAO account would be picked as the receiver. The
offset account is credited along with the debit of remitter account
•
A DAO account needs to be maintained in the Teller-> Demand draft details for each
bank +branch +currency combination
•
The related customer of the credit account thus obtained will be determined
•
The Swift address / BIC code for the customer will be obtained from the customer
address/BIC directory
MT 110 and MT 111 generated will not have any funding advice. The fields 53A and 54A will not
be populated for these messages.
The population of the tags of MT110 and MT111 will be as follows.
MT110 –
The receiver of MT110 will be the BIC for the customer corresponding to the Nostro a/c of the
Liquidation product’s ARC setup.
13-6
Message Text
Message Contents
Transaction Reference Number
20: Contract Reference Number of the DD transaction
Number of the Check
21: Instrument Number from the DD transaction
Date the Check was issued
30: Instrument Date from DD transaction
Currency and Amount of Check
32B: Instrument Currency, Instrument Amount
Payee of the Check
59. Beneficiary Name
MT111
The receiver of the MT111 will be the BIC for the customer corresponding to the Nostro a/c of the
liquidation product’s ARC setup.
13.1.6.1
Message Text
Message Contents
Transaction Reference Number
20: Contract Reference Number of the DD transaction
Number of the Check
21: Instrument Number from the DD transaction
Date the Check was issued
30: Instrument date from DD transaction
Currency and amount of Check
32B: Instrument Currency, Instrument Amount
Payee of the Check
59: Beneficiary Name
Mapping between Common Payment Gateway Fields and Instruments
The following table gives the mapping between the common payment gateway fields and the
fields supported by Instruments. This mapping is maintained in the system using the message
type – product category / product mapping screen.
Common Payment Gateway Field
Instruments Field
Source Reference
External Reference
Source Code
Source Code
Queue
Not mapped
Amount
Instrument Amount
Value Date
Instrument Date
Currency
Instrument Currency
13-7
Common Payment Gateway Field
Instruments Field
Status
Not mapped
Error Reason
Not mapped
Contract Reference Number
Not mapped (Generated upon upload)
Customer Account Number
Account Number
Customer Account Currency
Account Currency
Customer Amount
Amount in Account Currency
Customer Value Date
Not mapped
Counterparty Account Number
Beneficiary Account
Counterparty Currency
Beneficiary Account Currency
Counterparty Amount
Offset Amount
Counterparty Value Date
Not mapped
Exchange Rate
Exchange Rate
By Order Of (5 Columns)
Not mapped
Our Correspondent (5 Columns)
Not mapped
Receiver’s Correspondent (5 Columns)
Not mapped
Intermediary (5 Columns)
Not mapped
Account With Institution (5 Columns)
Not mapped
Beneficiary Institution1
Beneficiary Name
Beneficiary Institution 2
Beneficiary Address Line 1
Beneficiary Institution 3
Beneficiary Address Line 2
Beneficiary Institution 4
Beneficiary Address Line 3
Beneficiary Institution 5
Beneficiary Address Line 4
Payment Details (5 Columns)
Not mapped
Sender to Receiver Information (5 Columns)
Not mapped
Bank Operation Code
Not mapped
13-8
Common Payment Gateway Field
Instruments Field
Instruction Code
Not mapped
Related Reference Number
Not mapped
Reject Code
Not mapped
Reject Details
Not mapped
UDF_1
Instrument Number
UDF_2
DD MICR Number
UDF_3
Instrument Status
UDF_4
Identifier Name 1
UDF_5
Identifier Value 1
UDF_6
Identifier Name 2
UDF_7
Identifier Value 2
UDF_8
Identifier Name 3
UDF_9
Identifier Value 3
UDF_10
Identifier Name 4
UDF_11
Identifier Value 4
UDF_12
Identifier Name 5
UDF_13
Identifier Value 5
UDF_14
Identifier Name 6
UDF_15
Identifier Value 6
UDF_16
Charge Account
UDF_17
Expiry Date
Modification Number
Modification Number
UDF_18
SSN
UDF_19
Reissued Flag
UDF_20
Original Draft Number
13-9
Common Payment Gateway Field
Instruments Field
UDF_21
Reissue Remarks
UDF_22
Reissued Draft Number
UDF_23
Transaction Date
UDF_24
Beneficiary Customer Number
UDF_25
Print Status
UDF_26
Payable Bank
UDF_27
Copy of instrument printed
UDF_28
Offset Account
UDF_29
Offset Currency
UDF_30
Narrative
Maker Id
Maker Id
Maker Date Stamp
Maker Date Stamp
Authorizer Id
Authorizer Id
Checker Date Stamp
Checker Date Stamp
Record Status
Record Status
Authorization Status
Authorization Status
Authorized Once flag
Authorized Once flag
Message Type
Not mapped
Branch Code
Payable Branch
Version Number
Version Number
Latest Version Number
Not mapped
Customer Account Branch
Account Branch
Counterparty Account Branch
Offset Branch
13-10
13.2 Manual Processing for Uncollected Funds
Typically, uncollected funds on a payment instrument will be actually cleared after a specified
time interval, depending upon the type of instrument. This is referred to as the ‘availability
information’ for uncollected funds. The availability information is maintained for each kind of
transaction in your bank, represented by transaction codes in Oracle FLEXCUBE. You can
manually make available (or release) uncollected funds, before the available date, for credit
transactions.
13.2.1.1
Operations that you can perform
You can invoke the ‘Uncollected Funds Release’ screen by typing ‘ACDMUNCL’ in the field at the
top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button.
In the Uncollected Funds Release screen, you can choose to:
•
Release the uncollected funds for a credit transaction for which manual release has been
specified, or for which a float period has been specified. You can release the funds
before the available date is reached. The release can be automatic or manual. If
automatic, you can specify a To Date, and any transactions whose available date falls
between the application date and specified To Date can be released.
•
Specify a new available date for a credit transaction
•
Authorize any previous release of uncollected funds for a transaction
13-11
•
View any credit transactions for which manual release has been specified, or a float
period has been specified, or in respect of which funds have been previously released
and the release is pending authorization.
The operation you select here is used both to retrieve the transaction in this screen, and for
application of the operation when you select a transaction from the retrieved transaction list. Once
a record is released, the system internally stores the user ID of the person who released the
funds along with the release time.
13.2.1.2
Retrieving a Transaction
To perform any of these operations on a credit transaction, you must first retrieve the transaction
in this screen. To do so, you can employ any of the following means:
•
Select the operation you want to perform, by selecting the appropriate radio button in the
Fund Selection section
•
Select the release option, either Automatic or Manual, in the Option section. If you
specify an automatic release option, specify a To Date
13.2.1.3
Using the Amount Details Section
Alternatively, you can also choose to retrieve transactions of a particular customer, related to a
particular customer account, or a particular release status (uncollected funds or released funds
pending authorization). You must then use the fields in Amount section to make your
specifications for retrieval.
In this section, in any of the fields, you must press <F7> to enter a value as a search criterion,
and then press <F8> to execute the search. When you use the Account section to retrieve a
transaction, the radio buttons in the ‘Fund Selection’ section are disabled and cannot be used.
The operation selected in the Release Status field can be performed.
If you are using the fields in the Amount section to retrieve transactions, you can specify the debit
or credit account involved in the transaction, in the Amount field.
Any transactions that match your selection are displayed in the lower grid portion of the screen.
13.2.1.4
Selecting a Transaction for an Operation
After you have retrieved the transaction, the following details of the transaction are displayed:
•
The Available Date
•
The Account pertaining to the specified Uncollected Fund
•
Reference Number
•
Amount of the transaction
•
Release details, such as the user that released the transaction, and time of the release
13-12
In the list, Check the ‘Select’ box in the row of the transaction for which you want to perform the
selected operation, and then click ‘Exit’ button.
13.2.1.5
Making uncollected Funds available before the Available Date
You can use the Uncollected Funds Manual Release screen to indicate that uncollected funds
must be made available before the available date. In this screen, you must first display the
record of the transaction with uncollected funds, unlock it, and make funds available on the
application date, in the manner described above. The system sets the available date for such a
transaction as the application date, thereby ensuring the release of funds.
13.2.1.6
Changing the Available Date for a Transaction with uncollected Funds
In the Uncollected Funds Manual Release screen, you can also choose to change the available
date for a transaction with uncollected funds. To do this, you must first display the record of the
transaction with uncollected funds, unlock it, and specify a new available date in the Available
Date field. The system sets the available date for such a transaction as the new date you have
specified.
You can only specify a future date when you are changing the available date for a transaction
with uncollected funds.
13.3 Intra-day Release of Uncollected Funds
During the course of a business day, you can manually release uncollected funds for transactions
that have been posted using a transaction code for which the Intraday Release option has been
enabled, and are due for release on or before the current date. You can do this by executing the
Intraday Funds Release batch process, in the Intraday Funds Release screen.
You can invoke the ‘Intra Day Batch Start’ screen by typing ‘BABIDBAT’ in the field at the top
right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button.
The Beginning of Day process skips the release of uncollected funds in respect of transactions
posted using a transaction code for which the Intraday Release option has been enabled.
During the End of Day batch process, uncollected funds for transactions that have been posted
using a transaction code for which the Intraday Release option has been enabled, and are due for
release on or before the current date, are released. This takes place after all the End of
Transaction Input (EOTI) validations are performed.
13-13
The EOD batch processing ensures that, if the Intraday Release batch is not run, or the
transactions are posted after the Intraday Release batch is run, and the funds are due to be
released, the same is done. This is done just after performing all pre EOTI validations.
13.3.1 Querying for Details on Overdrawn Accounts
You can query for details of accounts that are overdrawn over limits through the ‘Overdrawn
Accounts Query’ screen.
You can view the following information in this screen:
•
Customer Number
•
Account Branch
•
Account Number
•
Account Currency
•
Facility Identifier
•
Line ID
•
Liability Number
•
Payable Balance: This is the available balance after taking limits into account. This is the
sum of the temporary overdraft and the minimum of the available amount for the line and
the sub limit.
•
Uncollected Funds- the funds which are pending collection on the customer account.
•
Uncollected Funds Limit
13-14
•
Withdrawable Uncollected Funds - this is the uncollected funds that will be released
either today or with a value date lesser than today. This is determined by your
specification for the Withdrawable Uncollected Funds Basis at the branch level, subject to
uncollected funds limit at the account level.
If, for a branch, you have specified the Uncollected Funds Basis as ‘Uncollected’, then the
total of uncollected funds is treated as uncollected funds. If your specification is ‘Uncollected
funds Avl same day’, then only that amount of uncollected funds which is available for the current
day or any previous day is treated as uncollected funds.
•
Overdrawn balance: The sum of payable balance including limits and the withdrawable
uncollected funds subject to uncollected funds limits. The overdrawn balance should be
negative.
•
Intraday uncollected fund release batch status
13-15
14. Overdraft Charge Reversal
For a customer, the system calculates the overdraft charge based on the overdrawn combined
book balance. This charge will be liquidated when the interest and charge batch is executed with
the next calendar date as its value date. FLEXCUBE gives you an option to waive off such
overdraft charge entries on the following day. You may reverse all or selected entries using
Charge Entry Details screen.
You can invoke this screen by typing ‘DEDODREV’ in the field at the top right corner of the
Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button.
You
can query the entries based on the customer number or SSN / TN numbers.
Customer No
Specify the customer number for which you wish to reverse the entries. The option list displays all
valid customer numbers maintained in the system. Choose the appropriate one.
SSN / TIN
Specify the SSN or TIN of the customer. The option list displays all valid SSN or TIN values
maintained in the system. Choose the appropriate one.
Once you have captured the details, click ‘Query’ button. The system displays interest liquidation
entries for the selected customer account, since the previous working day. Following details
pertaining to each entry will be displayed on the charge entries screen.
•
Branch
•
Account number
•
Product Code
14-1
•
Transaction Date
•
Transaction Reference Number
•
Debit / Credit indicator
•
Transaction Code
•
Amount
•
Currency
Select the entries to be reversed using the check box adjoined to each entry. You may select one
or more or all of entries for reversal. Further, click ’Reverse’ button on the screen. The system
reverses the entries using the reverse batch.
However, you cannot select an entry that has already been reversed. If you attempt to reverse
such an entry, the system will display an error message.
Also, this action will reverse the liquidation entry alone. Other accrual entries need to be reversed
manually, if required. Also, you are expected to verify whether the entry is a debit or credit to the
customer account. Usually, debit entries are reversed. The system will not verify this.
14.1.1 Maintaining Upload Source Code for OD Charge Reversal
The overdraft charge reversal is performed by a journal entry upload. Hence, you need to
maintain a source code to identify the source for the reversal batch using ‘Upload Source
Maintenance’ screen.
You can invoke this screen by typing ‘CODSORCE’ in the field at the top right corner of the
Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button.
14-2
Source Code
Enter a code to identify of the source that you are maintaining. For OD charge reversal, you can
specify ‘CHGREV’ as the source code.
Description
Enter a brief description as to the nature of the source.
14.1.2 Maintaining Upload Source Preferences for OD Charge Reversal
You need to set the preferences for the upload source maintained for overdraft charge reversal.
You can invoke this screen by typing ‘CODUPLDM’ in the field at the top right corner of the
Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button.
Enter the details as shown in the figure. The source code needs to be the one you have created
for OD charge reversal.
14.1.3 Maintaining Batch Reservation for OD Charge Reversal
You need to maintain a batch for the overdraft charge reversal using ‘Journal Batch Reservation
Maintenance’ screen. You can invoke this screen by typing ‘DEDBTRES’ in the field at the top
right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button.
14-3
Branch Code
Specify the code that identifies the for which you are maintaining the batch reservation.
Source Code
Specify the upload source code. For overdraft charge reversal, this has to be the source that you
have maintained for that purpose.
Batch Number
Enter a number to identify the batch.
Remarks
You can enter a brief description on the nature of the batch reservation.
Example for Charge Reversal
Customer ABC has account AC1.System date is 07 May, 2007.
The book balance as of 07 May, 2007 in account AC1 is USD 100,000 Dr.
Combined book balance for the customer is USD 100,000 Dr.
Suppose that the booking account for the overdraft interest charge is AC1 and the overdraft Interest rule is
calculated on the combined negative book balance of the account. The interest rule is Min (USD 25 and
0.01% of negative book balance).
Then, the overdraft interest charge = Min (25, 0.01 x 50,000/100) = Min (25, 5) which is USD 5
14-4
The interest liquidation entries for the same will be as shown:
Txn Date
Value Date
Txn Code
Customer Account
Dr/Cr
Amount
08-May-07
08-May-07
INT
AC1
Dr
5
08-May-07
08-May-07
INT
Interest Income GL
Cr
5
Suppose that there are two more overdrawn customers CIF1 and CIF2 with charges USD 10 and USD 15
respectively. On 08 May, 2007, when you select the overdraft charges liquidated, the system will display the
following:
TrnRef
Txn Date
Value Date
Txn
Code
Customer
Account
Dr/Cr
Amount
<16dig Ref>
08-May-07
08-May-07
INT
AC1
Dr
5
<16dig Ref>
08-May-07
08-May-07
INT
A/c of CIF1
Dr
10
<16dig Ref>
08-May-07
08-May-07
INT
A/c of CIF2
Dr
15
You may reverse all or some of the above entries.
If you opt to reverse the first two entries, the system will post the following authorized reversal entries:
Txn Date
Value Date
Txn
Code
Customer
Account
Dr/Cr
Amount
08-May-07
08-May-07
INT
AC1
Cr
5
08-May-07
08-May-07
INT
Int Income GL
Dr
5
08-May-07
08-May-07
INT
A/c of CIF1
Cr
10
08-May-07
08-May-07
INT
In Income GL
Dr
10
14-5
14.2 Interface Clearing Details
You can invoke the ‘Interface Clearing Details’ screen by typing ‘IFDCLGDT’ in the field at the top
right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button. You can view
the details of clearing transactions triggered from PDC using this screen.
For a post dated Check clearing transaction, you can select the following statuses from the
dropdown list:
•
Collection – When a normal Check launched for collection (Activation of PDC)
•
Collection after Discount - When a Discounted Check launched for collection (Activation
of PDC)
•
Collection after Purchase - When a Purchased Check launched for collection (Activation
of PDC)
•
Returned – When the Check is dishonored/rejected, the status of the PDC would be
updated to ‘Returned ‘
•
Passed - When the status of the funds is marked as collected, the status of the PDC will
be updated as ‘Passed’.
14-6
15. Suspicious Activity Reports
15.1 Introduction
Suspicious Activity Report (SAR) is the report for known or suspected violations of law or
suspicious activity observed by the bank subject to the regulations of the Bank Secrecy Act.
The bank can generate the SAR when it suspects the following:
•
Insider abuse within the bank
•
Violations of law aggregating over USD 5,000 where a subject can be identified
•
Violations of law aggregating over USD 25,000 regardless of a potential subject
•
Transactions aggregating USD 5,000 or more that involve potential money laundering or
violations of the Bank Secrecy Act
•
Customer doing unlicensed services or business
•
Computer intrusion
15.2 Processing Suspicious Activities
Oracle FLEXCUBE facilitates the handling of suspicious activities in your bank. This is done
through the following process:
•
Maintaining parameters for identifying suspicious activities
•
Running batches to extract information about suspicious activities based on the predefined parameters
•
Generating reports based on the information extracted during the batch runs
•
Maintaining suspicious accounts details in the system
These have been discussed in detail in the subsequent sections.
15.3 Maintaining Parameters
Before running batches, you are required to specify the basis on which the suspicious activities
should be identified. These can be maintained as follows
15.3.1 Maintaining Product Tolerance Limit Details
You can maintain tolerance limit for various products through the ‘Product Tolerance Limit
Maintenance’ screen. You can invoke this screen by typing ‘CADPTLM’ in the field at the top right
corner of the Application toolbar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button.
15-1
Specify the following details:
Branch
Specify the branch in which the tolerance limit is applicable. The adjoining option list displays the
branches that are maintained in the system. You can select the appropriate one.
Module
Specify the module for which the tolerance limit is applicable. The adjoining option list displays
the modules that are maintained in the system. You can select the appropriate one.
Product Code
Specify the product for which you are defining the tolerance limit. The adjoining option list
displays the products that are maintained in the system. You can select the appropriate one.
Product Description
The system displays the description for the product.
Tolerance Limit (USD)
Specify the tolerance limit for the product selected. This needs to be in USD.
15.3.2 Viewing Product Tolerance Limit Summary Details
You can view the tolerance limit of the specific product through the ‘Product Tolerance Limit
Summary’ screen. You can invoke this screen by typing ‘CASPTLM’ in the field at the top right
corner of the Application toolbar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button.
15-2
You can query on records based on any or all of the following criteria:
•
Authorization Status
•
Record Status
•
Tolerance Limit (USD)
•
Product Description
•
Product Code
•
Module
•
Branch
Click ‘Search’ button. The system identifies all records satisfying the specified criteria and
displays the following details for each one of them:
•
Authorization Status
•
Record Status
•
Tolerance Limit (USD)
•
Product Description
•
Product Code
•
Module
15-3
•
Branch
15.3.3 Maintaining Deposit Turnover Ratio Details
You can maintain deposit turnover ratio for the specific product through the ‘Deposit Turnover
Ratio Maintenance’ screen. You can invoke this screen by typing ‘CADPDTR’ in the field at the
top right corner of the Application toolbar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button.
Specify the following details:
Branch
Specify the branch. The adjoining option list displays the branches that are maintained in the
system. You can select the appropriate one.
Module
Specify the module. The adjoining option list displays the modules that are maintained in the
system. You can select the appropriate one.
Product Code
Specify the product. The adjoining option list displays the products that are maintained in the
system. You can select the appropriate one.
Product Description
The system displays the product code description.
Deposit Turn over Ratio
Specify the turnover ratio.
15-4
15.3.4 Viewing Deposit Turnover Ratio Summary Details
You can view the deposit turnover ratio for the specific product through the ‘Deposit Turnover
Ratio Summary screen. You can invoke this screen by typing ‘CASPDTR’ in the field at the top
right corner of the Application toolbar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button.
You can query on records based on any or all of the following criteria:
•
Authorization Status
•
Record Status
•
Product Code
•
Module
•
Branch
Click ‘Search’ button. The system identifies all records satisfying the specified criteria and
displays the following details for each one of them:
•
Authorization Status
•
Record Status
•
Product Code
•
Module
•
Branch
15-5
15.4 Running Batches
During BOD operations, the following batches will be run by the system to identify the suspicious
activities in the current account, savings accounts, and deposits:
•
Significant Balance Change accounts batch (CIFTLM)
•
Kiting Report 1 Batch
•
Kiting Report 2 Batch
•
NSF or OD Batch
15.4.1 Significant Balance Change Accounts Batch
This batch will identify the list of accounts which has a significant balance changes. This Batch
program will pick up all the accounts for the configured products which cross the threshold
balance and populate the same them in a repository
For more information on threshold balance and products, refer ‘Maintaining Product Tolerance
Limit Details’ section in this chapter.
15.4.2 Kiting Report 1 Batch
This batch will identify the list of accounts where the deposit turnover ratio crosses the threshold
limit. The Deposit Turnover Ratio is calculated by taking the sum of all credits for the last 7 day
period divided by the sum of the debits for that same 7 day period.
15.4.3 Kiting Report 2 Batch
This batch will identify the list of accounts where the day total debits is greater than day’s current
balance less day’s and yesterday’s credits.
15.4.4 Non Sufficient Fund or Overdraft (NSD or OD)Batch
This batch will identify the list of NSF or OD accounts and store in a repository.
15.5 Generating Reports
During the day, or at the end of the day, you may want to retrieve information on any of the
several operations that were performed during the day in your bank. You can generate this
information in the form of reports in ORACLE FLEXCUBE.
You can generate the following reports:
•
Significant Balance Change accounts Report
•
Kiting Report 1
15-6
•
Kiting Report 2
•
NSF or OD Report
For more information, refer the section ‘Reports’ in this chapter.
15.6 Maintaining Suspicious Activities Report Details
Based on the generated reports, the list of accounts that are involved in suspicious activities can
be identified and maintained in the ‘Suspicious Activity Report Detailed’ screen. You can invoke
this screen by typing ‘CADSARM’ in the field at the top right corner of the Application toolbar and
clicking on the adjoining arrow button.
Specify the following details:
Branch
Specify the branch in which the suspicious activity is identified. The adjoining option list displays
the branches that are maintained in the system. You can select the appropriate one.
Suspect Customer ID
Specify the suspicious customer number. The adjoining option list displays all valid customer
numbers maintained in the system. Choose the appropriate one.
Initial Date
The system displays the initial date.
Modification Date
The system displays the date when the modification is done. However you can modify it.
15-7
Suspect Status
Select the suspect status of the customer from the adjoining drop-down list. The list displays the
following values:
•
Active
•
Inactive
Suspect Information
Specify the following details:
Full Name
The system displays the full name of the customer based on the customer id selected.
Short Name
The system displays the short name of the customer based on the customer id selected.
SSN/TIN
The system displays the SSN/TIN of the customer based on the customer id selected.
Date of Birth
The system displays the date of birth of the customer based on the customer id selected.
Date Reported to GOV
Specify the date reported to GOV.
SAR Reason
Select the reason for SAR from the adjoining drop-down list. The list displays the following
values:
•
Bank Secrecy Act/Structuring/
•
Money Laundering
•
Bribery/Gratuity
•
Check Fraud
•
Check Kiting
•
Commercial Loan Fraud
•
Computer Intrusion
•
Consumer Loan Fraud
•
Counterfeit Check
15-8
•
Counterfeit Credit/Debit Card
•
Counterfeit Instrument (other)
•
Credit Card Fraud
•
Debit Card Fraud
•
Defalcation/Embezzlement
•
False Statement
•
Misuse of Position or Self Dealing
•
Mortgage Loan Fraud
•
Mysterious Disappearance
•
Wire Transfer Fraud
•
Terrorist Financing
•
Identity Theft
•
Other
Suspect Information Unavailable
Check this box to indicate that the suspect information is not available.
Account Information
Specify the following details:
Account Number
Specify the account number of the suspicious customer. The adjoining option list displays all valid
account numbers based on the customer id selected. Choose the appropriate one.
Full Name
The system displays the full name of the customer based on the customer id selected.
A/C Status
The system displays the account status of the customer.
Report to GOV
Specify the date reported to GOV
SAR Reason
Select the reason for SAR from the adjoining drop-down list. The list displays the following
values:
15-9
•
Bank Secrecy Act/Structuring/
•
Money Laundering
•
Bribery/Gratuity
•
Check Fraud
•
Check Kiting
•
Commercial Loan Fraud
•
Computer Intrusion
•
Consumer Loan Fraud
•
Counterfeit Check
•
Counterfeit Credit/Debit Card
•
Counterfeit Instrument (other)
•
Credit Card Fraud
•
Debit Card Fraud
•
Defalcation/Embezzlement
•
False Statement
•
Misuse of Position or Self Dealing
•
Mortgage Loan Fraud
•
Mysterious Disappearance
•
Wire Transfer Fraud
•
Terrorist Financing
•
Identity Theft
•
Other
SAR A/C Status
Select the account status of SAR from the adjoining drop-down list. The list displays the following
values:
•
Active
•
Inactive
If the customer account is marked for SAR, but not displayed in any of the reports, an
override message will be displayed asking for your confirmation. You need to confirm it.
15-10
15.7 Viewing Suspicious Activities Report Summary Details
You can view the summary of the suspicious activities of the customer through the ‘Suspicious
Activity Report Summary’ screen. You can invoke this screen by typing ‘CASSARM’ in the field at
the top right corner of the Application toolbar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button.
You can query on records based on any or all of the following criteria:
•
Authorization Status
•
Record Status
•
Branch
•
Suspect Customer ID
•
Full Name
•
Suspect Status
•
SSN/TIN
Click ‘Search’ button. The system identifies all records satisfying the specified criteria and
displays the following details for each one of them:
•
Authorization Status
15-11
•
Record Status
•
Branch
•
Suspect Customer ID
•
Full Name
•
Suspect Status
•
SSN/TIN
15-12
16. Glossary
16.1 Important Terms
Amount Block
It refers to the portion of the balances of a customer account that is designated to be set apart for
specific purposes, and cannot be withdrawn. The ‘blocking’ can be set up either on request from
either the customer or the bank.
Check Book
It is one of the means that the bank provides to the customer for withdrawal of balances from the
account. It consists of a specified number of leaves, against each of which a specified amount
can be drawn from the account balance.
Effective Date
It is the date on and following which an amount block on a customer account becomes effective.
End Check Number
It is the number of the last check in a range of checks against which a customer directs the bank
to stop payment.
Modification Number
It is the serial number of a check status modification. It is incremented serially each time the
status of a check is modified.
Start Check Number
It is the number of the first check in a range of checks against which a customer directs the bank
to stop payment.
Stop Payment Instruction
A directive from a customer to the bank instructing that payment against a check must be
stopped. The directive could specify an amount in respect of a check, a single check or a range
of checks.
16-1
17. Reports
17.1 Introduction
During the day, or at the end of the day, you may want to retrieve information on any of the
several operations that were performed during the day in your bank. You can generate this
information in the form of reports in ORACLE FLEXCUBE.
For every module you can generate reports, which give you data about the various events in the
life of a specific contract, or across contracts, at a specific point in time. You can have analysis
reports, daily reports, exception reports (reports on events that ought to have taken place on the
contract but have not, due to various reasons), and history reports and so on.
From the Application Browser, select the Reports option. A list of all the modules to which you
have access rights are displayed in the screen. When you click on a module, all the reports for
which you have access rights under the selected module are displayed. Click on the report you
want to generate. You will be given a selection Criteria based on which the report would be
generated.
You can generate the following reports:
•
Check book Details Report
•
CASA Stop Payment Report
•
Significant Balance Change accounts Report
•
Kiting Report 1
•
Kiting Report 2
•
NSF or OD Report
17.2 Check Book Details Report
This report gives details of the Check book of a customer.
You can invoke this screen by typing ‘CARPCKDT’ in the field at the top right corner of the
Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button.
17-1
Selection Options
You can indicate the following preferences for generating the report:
Report For
Select the option ‘Selected Account’ if you want to generate the Check book details report for a
selected account. Select the option ‘All Accounts’ if you want to generate reports for all accounts.
Account
If you have selected the option ‘Selected Account’ select the account for which the Check detail
report has to be generated from the adjoining option list.
Contents of the report
The options that you specified while generating the report are printed at the beginning of the
report. The contents of the Check Book Details Report are discussed under the following heads:
Header
The Header carries the title of the Report, information on the branch code, branch date, the date
and time of report generation, the user-ID of the user generating the report, module, page and the
event date.
Body of the report
Account
The account number of the customer
Description
The description of the account
Check No
The Check leaf number
Status
The status of the Check
17-2
Amount
The amount for which the Check is issued
Presented On
The date on which the Check is presented in
the bank
Date on
Check
The date as given on the Check
Beneficiary
The name of the person in whose name the
Check is issued
17.3 Savings/Checking Stop Payment Report
This report gives details of the stop payment details issued on a Check.
You can invoke this screen by typing ‘CARPSPMT’ in the field at the top right corner of the
Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button.
Selection Options
You can indicate the following preferences for generating the report:
Report For
Select the option ‘Selected Account’ if you want to generate the Check book details report for a
selected account. Select the option ‘All Accounts’ if you want to generate reports for all accounts.
Account
If you have selected the option ‘Selected Account’ select the account for which the Check detail
report has to be generated from the adjoining option list.
17-3
Contents of the report
The options that you specified while generating the report are printed at the beginning of the
report.
The contents of the Stop Payment Report are discussed under the following heads:
Header
The Header carries the title of the Report, information on the branch code, branch date, the date
and time of report generation, the user-ID of the user generating the report, module, page and the
event date.
Body of the report
Account
The account number of the customer
Description
The description of the account
Stop Payment
No
The stop payment instruction number
Type
The stop payment can be issued either on an
amount or on Check(s)
Start Check
No
The starting Check leaf number
End Check No
The ending Check leaf number
Amount
The amount for which stop payment is done
Effective Dt
The date from which the stop payment is
effective
Expiry Dt
The date on which the stop payment validity
will expire
Acc CCy
Account CCy
17.4 Customer Statistics Data
The table below displays customer statistics for the last six months.
17-4
Body of the report
Customer
Number
FLEXCUBE Customer Number
Account No
FLEXCUBE Account Number
Acc Currency
Account Currency
Cust. Name
Customer name
Acc Branch
The branch in which the account was
created
Last Debit
Last debit amount on the account for the
month
Last Credit
Last credit amount on the account for the
month
Last Over Draft
Last overdraft amount on the account for
the month
Simple Average
Balance
Simple Average balance of the account
for the month
Minimum
Balance
Minimum balance of the account for the
month
Maximum
balance
Maximum balance of the account for the
month
No Of Dr
transactions
Number of debit transactions for that
month
No of Cr
Transactions
Number of credit transactions for that
month
Closing Balance
Month end closing balance of that
account
Total Balance
The balance of account (including the limit
+ uncleared / uncollected funds)
No of Returned
Checks
Total number of Checks returned on the
account for that month
Debit Interest
Month END IC (Debit interest liquidated
for that account only will be considered)
N.S.F
Number of transactions which could not
be completed owing to Insufficient
17-5
Balance in the account for the month
CHG'BLE TR
Number of chargeable transactions for
the month
DB.CHK.RTD
Number of Checks returned for the month
Debit AVG
Debit average for the month
Days in Debit
Number of days in debit for the month
Monthly Debit
AVG
Debit average for the month
Credit AVG
Credit average
Days in Credit
Number of days in Credit for the month
Monthly Credit
AVG
Monthly credit average
XOD AVG
Excess overdraft average for the month
DAYS XOD
Number of days in excess overdraft for
the month
MNTH AV
Excess overdraft average
Number of times
gone into
Overdraft
Number of times the account went into
overdraft for the month
The balance is shown in terms of the account currency.
17.5 Account statement Reports
You can get the details of the account statement reports using ‘Account Statement Reports’
screen.
17-6
You can invoke this screen by typing ‘ACDOPTN’ in the field at the top right corner of the
Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button.
You can indicate the following preferences for generating the report:
Account Selection Type
You have to indicate the account selection type of the customer. The options available are:
•
One Account
•
Multiple Account
•
Range
Statement Type
You have to indicate the statement type of the customer. The options available are:
•
Brief
•
Detailed
17-7
Date Range
You can indicate the following:
From Date
Specify the date from when you are generating this report.
To Date
Specify the date till when you are generating this report.
Single Account
Account Number
Specify the account number. The option list displays all valid account numbers. Choose the
appropriate one.
Account Currency
Specify the account currency. The option list displays all valid account currencies. Choose the
appropriate one.
Charge
You have to indicate the type of charges. The options available are:
•
Null - Select this option If statement needs to be generated devoid of charge
•
Fixed Charge - Select this option If statement needs to be generated with a fixed amount
of charge
•
Based on date Range - Select this option of statement needs to be generated and the
charge for the same will be based on the duration of the period selected. (Difference
between the from date and the to-date)
Show Linked A/C Details
Check this box if you wish to show linked account details.
Dates
You have to indicate the type of dates. The options available are:
•
Booking Dated
•
Value Dated
17-8
Select Multiple Accounts
Account Number
Specify the account number. The option list displays all valid account numbers. Choose the
appropriate one.
Print Options
You have to indicate the type of print options. The options available are:
•
View
•
Sever Spool
From Account Number
Specify the account number from which the report needs to be generated.. You can select the
appropriate number from the adjoining option list that displays all the accounts maintained in the
system.
To Account Number
Specify the account number to which the report needs to be generated. You can select the
appropriate number from the adjoining option list that displays all the accounts maintained in the
system.
From Account Currency
Specify the account currency from which the report needs to be generated. You can select the
appropriate currency from the adjoining option list that displays all the currencies maintained in
the system.
To Account Currency
Specify the account currency to which the report needs to be generated. You can select the
appropriate currency from the adjoining option list that displays all the currencies maintained in
the system.
Contents of the report
The options that you specified while generating the report are printed at the beginning of the
report.
The contents of the Account Statement Report are discussed under the following heads:
Header
An Account Statement is the record of transactions and their effect on account balances over a
specified period of time for a given account. An Account Statement lists the debits and credits
that took place over a time period.
17-9
The Header carries the title of the Report, information on the Account Number of the user
generating the report.
Body of the report
Branch Name
This is the branch where the
account resides.
Branch Address 1
This is the address of the branch.
Branch Address 2
This is the address of the branch.
Branch Address 3
This is the address of the branch.
Account Number
Details about customer account
Number.
From date
This is from date.
To date
This is to date.
Page Number
This is the page number.
As of Date
As of date.
Customer Number
This is the customer number.
Customer Name
This is the customer name.
Customer Address 1
This is the address of the
customer.
Customer Address 2
This is the address of the
customer.
Customer Address 3
This is the address of the
customer.
Customer Address 4
This is the address of the
customer.
17-10
Opening Balance
This is the opening balance of the
customer.
Transaction code
Description
This is the description of the
transaction code.
Transaction reference
Number
This is the reference number of
the account for which transaction
details is being reported
Opening Date
The opening date of the account.
Previous Date
Gives the date of the previous
statement.
Transaction Booking
Date
This is the transaction booking
date.
Transaction Amount
This is the transaction amount.
Additional Information
Gives some additional
information.
Debit-Credit Indicator
This indicates the nature of the
transaction – debit or credit.
Closing Balance
This indicates the closing
balance.
Available Balance
This indicate the available
balance.
Blocked Balance
This indicates the blocked
balance.
Uncollected Balance
This indicates the uncollected
balance.
Number of Debits
Indicates the number of debit
transactions.
Number of Credits
Indicates the number of credit
transactions.
Total Debit Value
Indicates the total debit value.
Total Credit Value
Indicates the total credit value.
17-11
17.6 Significant Balance Change accounts Report
This report will be generated to display the list of accounts with increase or decrease of the DDA
balance in excess of the balance change parameter at product level. It should be generated daily
or ad-hoc basis.
You can invoke this screen by typing ‘CARSIGN’ in the field at the top right corner of the
Application toolbar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button.
You can enter the following details:
Branch Code
Specify the branch code for transaction. The option list displays all valid branch codes maintained
in the system. Choose the appropriate one.
Product Code
Specify the product code for transaction. The option list displays all valid product codes
maintained in the system. Choose the appropriate one.
From Date
Specify the date from which the transactions need to be considered for report generation.
To Date
Specify the date until which transactions need to be considered for report generation.
Amount of Change
Specify the balance change in amount. The report will include the transaction if the amount of
change is greater than or equal to given amount.
Percent of Change
Specify the balance change in percent.
The generated report will contain the following elements:
17-12
Sr.No.
Field
Name
Field
Description
Report Field
1
Account
No.
DDA Account
Number
STTM_CUST_ACCOUNT.CUST_AC_NO
2
Account
Name/
Customer
Name
Name of
DDA account
holder
STTM_CUST_ACCOUNT.FULL_NAME
3
Account
Type
Account Type
is Current
Account for
DDA
STTM_ACCOUNT_CLASS.AC_CLASS_TY
PE
4
Branch
Branch of the
Customer/Ac
count
ACTB_HISTORY.AC_BRANCH
5
Date
Opened
DDA Account
Open Date
STTM_ACCOUNT_CLASS.
AC_OPEN_DATE
6
Officer
CHECKER_ID
7
Yesterday’
s EOD
Balance
Account
currency
opening
balance for
that day
ACY_OPENING_BAL
8
Current
Balance
Current
Balance
ACY_CURR_BALANCE
9
YTD Avg
Collected
Balance
Not available
REG_CC_AVAILABLE_FUNDS
10
Amount of
Change
The
difference
between
current
balance and
yesterday’s
EOD balance
Difference between ACY_CURR_BALANCE
and ACY_OPENING_BAL
11
Percent of
Change
Percentage
of item 10
ACY_CURR_BALANCE minus
ACY_OPENING_BAL is divided by
ACY_OPENING_BALANCE
12
Type of
This indicator
This will contain one of the following values
17-13
Sr.No.
Field
Name
Field
Description
Significant
change
would be
selected if
large credit is
identified
Report Field
Large Credit
Large Debit
Debit Turnover greater than Threshold
Credit Turnover greater than Threshold
17.7 Kiting Report 1
This report will be generated to display the deposit turnover ratio less than 3. The deposit
turnover ratio is calculated by taking the sum of all credits for last 7 days period divided by sum of
debits for that same 7 day period. It should be generated daily or Ad-hoc basis
You can invoke this screen by typing ‘CARKIT1’ in the field at the top right corner of the
Application toolbar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button.
You can enter the following details:
Branch Code
Specify the branch code for transaction. The option list displays all valid branch codes maintained
in the system. Choose the appropriate one.
Deposit Turnover Ratio
The system displays the deposit turn over ratio which is less than 3. However, you can modify it.
17-14
From Date
Specify the date from which the transactions need to be considered for report generation.
To Date
Specify the date until which transactions need to be considered for report generation.
No of Consecutive Days
Specify the number of days for which the transactions need to be considered for report
generation.
The generated report will contain the following elements:
Sr.No.
Field Name
Field Description
1
Account No.
STTM_CUST_ACCOUNT.CUST_
AC_NO
DDA Account Number
2
Account
Name
STTM_CUSTOMER.FULL_NAM
E
Name of account holder
name
3
Account
Type
STTM_ACCOUNT_CLASS.AC_C
LASS_TYPE
Checker User Name
4
Officer
AUTH_ID
Value date of TD
account
5
Branch
AC_BRANCH
Branch
6
Current
DDA
Balance
STTM_CUST_ACCOUNT.ACY_C
URR_BALANCE
Account Current
Balance
7
Aggregate 7
day Credits
-Amount
Sum of LCY_AMOUNT for last 7
days where DRCR_IND=’D’
Sum of credit for last 7
days
8
Aggregate 7
day Debits
- Amount
Sum of LCY_AMOUNT for last 7
days where DRCR_IND=’C’
Sum of debit for last 7
days
9
Unavailable
balance
If ACY_CURR_BALANCE is zero
or negative amount then report
should says Unavailable balance
Not Available
10
Date Last
Deposit
11
Deposit
Turn Over
Not Available
Sum of LCY_AMOUNT for last 7
days where DRCR_IND=’D’ is
divided by Sum of LCY_AMOUNT
17-15
Aggregate 7 day credits
amount divided by
Sr.No.
Field Name
Field Description
for last 7 days where
DRCR_IND=’D’
Aggregate 7 day debit
12
Ratio of
Today’s
Debit
Amounts to
Customer
unavailable
Funds
Sum of LCY_AMOUNT for last 7
days where DRCR_IND=’D’ is
divided by ACY CURR
BALANCE if it is negative balance
Total of today’s debit
divided by Customer
unavailable balance
13
Consecutive
Days on
Report # of
days
reported on
this report
No. of days
No. of days
17.8 Kiting Report 2
This report will be generated only if today’ total debit is greater than today’s current balance less
today’s and yesterday’s credit. It should be generated daily or Ad-hoc basis
You can invoke this screen by typing ‘CARKIT2’ in the field at the top right corner of the
Application toolbar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button.
You can enter the following details:
17-16
Branch Code
Specify the branch code for transaction. The option list displays all valid branch codes maintained
in the system. Choose the appropriate one.
From Date
Specify the date from which the transactions need to be considered for report generation.
To Date
Specify the date until which transactions need to be considered for report generation.
No of Consecutive Days
Specify the number of days for which the transactions need to be considered for report
generation.
The generated report will contain the following elements:
Sr.No.
Field Name
Field
Description
Field Name
1
Account No
Account
Number
STTM_CUST_ACCOUNT.CUST_AC_NO
2
Account
Name
Name of
account
holder
STTM_CUSTOMER.FULL_NAME
3
Account Type
Account
Type
whether it is
DDA or
COD or
SAV
STTM_ACCOUNT_CLASS.AC_CLASS_TY
PE
4
Officer
Checker
User Name
AUTH_ID
5
Branch
Branch
AC_BRANCH
6
Yesterday’s
total credits
Total credits
of yesterday
Sum of yesterdays credit’s where
ACTB_HISTORY=DRCR_IND=’C’
7
Total’s today
credits
Total credits
of Today
Sum of today credits where
ACTB_HISTORY=DRCR_IND=’C’
8
Current
Balance
Current
Balance
STTM_CUST_ACCOUNT.ACY_CURR_BA
LANCE
17-17
Sr.No.
Field Name
Field
Description
Field Name
9
Debits Today
Total debits
of Today
Sum of today debits where
ACTB_HISTORY=DRCR_IND=’D’
10
OD Limit
Over Draft
Limit
STTM_CUST_ACOUNT.TOD_LIMIT
11
Days
Consecutively
on report
No. of days
should be
included
No. of days
17.9 Non Sufficient Funds or Overdraft Report
This report will be generated only if customer account’s current balance is lesser than zero. It
should be generated daily or Ad-hoc basis
You can invoke this screen by typing ‘CARNSFOD’ in the field at the top right corner of the
Application toolbar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button.
You can enter the following details:
Branch Code
Specify the branch code for transaction. The option list displays all valid branch codes maintained
in the system. Choose the appropriate one.
Customer Number
Specify the customer number for transaction. The option list displays all valid customer numbers
maintained in the system. Choose the appropriate one.
Account Number
Specify the account number of the customer. The option list displays all valid account numbers
maintained in the system. Choose the appropriate one.
17-18
NSF Days
Specify the number of non sufficient fund days for which the transactions need to be considered
for report generation.
From Date
Specify the date from which the transactions need to be considered for report generation.
To Date
Specify the date until which transactions need to be considered for report generation.
The generated report will contain the following elements:
Sr.No.
Field
Name
Field
Description
Field Name
1
Account
number
Account
Number
STTM_CUST_ACCOUNT.CUST_AC_NO
2
Officer
Checker
User Name
AUTH_ID
3
Branch
4
Account
type
Account
Type
whether it is
DDA or
COD or
SAV
STTM_ACCOUNT_CLASS.AC_CLASS_TYPE
5
Account
name
and
address
Name of
account
holder
STTM_CUSTOMER.FULL_NAME
STTM_CUSTOMER.ADDRESS_LINE1,
STTM_CUSTOMER.ADDRESS_LINE2,
STTM_CUSTOMER.ADDRESS_LINE3,
6
Average
collected
balance
Not
Available
Not Available
7
Hold
amount
Blocked or
Hold
amount
STTM_CUST_ACCOUNT.ACY_BLOCKED_AM
OUNT
8
Overdraft
limit
Over Draft
Limit
STTM_CUST_ACOUNT.TOD_LIMIT
9
Last
customer
Query LCY_AMOUNT from ACTB_DAILY_LOG
where DRCR_IND is Credit and then get the last
17-19
Sr.No.
Field
Name
Field
Description
deposit
amount
Field Name
transaction as deposit amount
10
Deposit
date
Deposit
date
Query VALUE_DT from ACTB_DAILY_LOG
where account type is deposit
11
Date
opened
Account
Open Date
STTM_CUST_ACCOUNT. AC_OPEN_DATE
12
Credit
limit
Credit
Transaction
Limit
STTM_CUST_ACCOUNT.CREDIT_TXN_LIMIT
13
Available
credit
14
Days OD
No of days
the account
has availed
OD
The difference between
TOD_LIMIT_START_DATE,
TOD_LIMIT_ENd_DATE
15
Number
of times
NSF
Non
Sufficient
fund (NSF)
will be
limited
Query current balance from customer account
and if yes then count no. of rows from
actb_vd_balance for NSF
Not Available
17.10 ACH Stop Payment Reports
You can generate ACH stop payment reports using the ‘ACH Stop Payment Report’ screen. You
can invoke this screen by typing ‘STRPSPMT’ in the field at the top right corner of the Application
toolbar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button.
17-20
Specify the following fields:
Branch/Account Details
Branch Code
Specify the branch code of the bank which was instructed to stop payment. The adjoining option
list displays a list of branch codes maintained in the system. Choose the appropriate one.
Single Account/All Accounts
Indicate the type of account for which you want to generate the report. You can select from the
following options:
•
Single Account – if you want to generate report for a single account.
•
All Accounts – if you want to generate report for all accounts.
Account Number
Specify the account number. The adjoining option list displays a list of account numbers
maintained in the system. Choose the appropriate one.
Date Range
Specify the date range for report generation.
From Date
Indicate the start date from which records should be considered for report generation, using the
adjoining calendar.
17-21
To Date
Indicate the end date until which records should be considered for report generation, using the
adjoining calendar.
The report consists of the following information:
•
Account Number
•
Account Type
•
Hold Amount
•
Hit or Suspect
•
Stop Effective Date
•
Stop Expiry Date
•
Transaction Amount
•
Amount Low Range
•
Amount High Range
•
Stop Pay Ref No.
17-22
18. Annexure A
18.1 Introduction
This section details format of ‘PD_PDC_CAN’ message.
18.2 Format of PD_PDC_CAN Message Type
The following is the format of ‘PD_PDC_CAN’ message type:
Date
:
02-Feb-2010
Drawee Bank
:
Citi Bank
Branch
:
M G Road
Customer Account Number
:
123456789
Cancellation details:
Check No
Status
524163
Cancelled
524164
Cancelled
524165
Cancelled
524166
Cancelled
524167
Cancelled
524168
Cancelled
‘The above said Checks has been cancelled’
‘PD_PDC_CAN’ message type addresses the primary customer.
18-1
17. Annexure B - Accounting Entries
17.1 Accounting Entries and Advices for CASA
This Annexure lists the suggested event-wise accounting entries that can be set up, for the
Interest and Charge product applicable for the CASA module of Oracle FLEXCUBE.
17.2 Events
You need to set up the following events for an Interest product:
Event Code
Event Description
ILIQ
Interest Liquidation
IACR
Interest Accruals
UDCH
UDE Values
Change
You need to set up the following events for a Charge product:
Event Code
Event Description
CLIQ
Charge Liquidation
17.3 Amount Tags
The following amount tags are available:
Amount Tags
Description
IACR
Interest Accrued
CHARGE
Charge Accrued
IACQUIRED
IACR_ADJ
Interest Accrual Adjustment
ILIQ
Interest liquidation
TAX
Tax Accrual
TAX_ADJ
Tax Adjustment
17-1
17.4 Accounting Roles
Accounting roles for CASA are defaulted by FLEXCUBE in a following manner:
‘SAXX’ - ‘accounting role type’ – ‘X’
SAXX represents the IC rule ID you have maintained and attached to the particular IC product.
This is based on your own convention. Accounting role type is for example the accrual, P/L, or tax
payment. For creation of role type system uses standard abbreviations across FLEXCUBE. ‘X’ is
a number which is the number of the formula for which the accounting role is created.
If you have maintained more than one formula at rule level FLEXCUBE will default accounting
roles for each of your accounting roles
Example:
SAAB-ACCR-1 = accounting role for accrual pertaining to SAAB product, formula #1. (for example credit
interest accrual which was defined in formula 1. )
SAAB-PNL-2 = accounting role for income or expense booking pertaining to SAAB product, formula #2. (for
example debit interest posting against income GL)
You should select the appropriate accounting role on the “Role to head mapping” tab.
Note: SAXX-BOOK-X represents the settlement account where the amount is credited or debited against
P/L account. This role cannot attached to any GL on “Role to head mapping” screen but it is used while
event-wise entries are maintained
Accounting roles for Sample IC Product with rule ID like CHAV are given below:
The following accounting roles are available:
Accounting Role
Description
CHAV-ACQUIRED-1
CHAV ACQUIRED INTEREST FORMULA 1
CHAV-PNL_ADJ-1
CHAV PNL - ADJ - FORMULA 1
CHAV-PNL-1
CHAV INCOME/EXPENSE A/C FORMULA 1
CHAV-TPBL_ADJ-2
CHAV TAX PAYABLE A/C - FORMULA 2
CHAV-TPBL-2
CHAV TAX PAYABLE A/C - FORMULA 2
CHG_INCOME
CHARGES INCOME
DORM-ACQUIRED-1
DORM ACQUIRED INTEREST FORMULA 1
DORM-PNL_ADJ-1
DORM PNL - ADJ - FORMULA 1
DORM-PNL-1
DORM INCOME/EXPENSE A/C FORMULA 1
IBSR-ACCR-1
IBSR ACCRUAL A/C - FORMULA 1
17-2
Accounting Role
Description
IBSR-ACCR-2
IBSR ACCRUAL A/C - FORMULA 2
IBSR-ACQUIRED-1
IBSR ACQUIRED INTEREST FORMULA 1
IBSR-ACQUIRED-2
IBSR ACQUIRED INTEREST FORMULA 2
IBSR-ACR_ADJ-1
IBSR ACR - ADJ - FORMULA 1
IBSR-ACR_ADJ-2
IBSR ACR - ADJ - FORMULA 2
IBSR-PNL_ADJ-1
IBSR PNL - ADJ - FORMULA 1
IBSR-PNL_ADJ-2
IBSR PNL - ADJ - FORMULA 2
IBSR-PNL-1
IBSR INCOME/EXPENSE A/C FORMULA 1
IBSR-PNL-2
IBSR INCOME/EXPENSE A/C FORMULA 2
IBSR-TPBL_ADJ-3
IBSR TAX PAY ADJ A/C - FORMULA 3
IBSR-TPBL-3
IBSR TAX PAYABLE A/C - FORMULA 3
IOCC-ACCR-1
IOCC ACCRUAL A/C - FORMULA 1
IOCC-ACCR-2
IOCC ACCRUAL A/C - FORMULA 2
IOCC-ACQUIRED-1
IOCC ACQUIRED INTEREST FORMULA 1
IOCC-ACQUIRED-2
IOCC ACQUIRED INTEREST FORMULA 2
IOCC-ACR_ADJ-1
IOCC ACR - ADJ - FORMULA 1
IOCC-ACR_ADJ-2
IOCC ACR - ADJ - FORMULA 2
IOCC-PNL_ADJ-1
IOCC PNL - ADJ - FORMULA 1
IOCC-PNL_ADJ-2
IOCC PNL - ADJ - FORMULA 2
IOCC-PNL-1
IOCC INCOME/EXPENSE A/C FORMULA 1
IOCC-PNL-2
IOCC INCOME/EXPENSE A/C FORMULA 2
IOCC-TPBL_ADJ-3
IOCC TAX PAY ADJ A/C - FORMULA 3
17-3
Accounting Role
Description
IOCC-TPBL-3
IOCC TAX PAYABLE A/C - FORMULA 3
IOCM-ACCR-1
IOCM ACCRUAL A/C - FORMULA 1
IOCM-ACCR-2
IOCM ACCRUAL A/C - FORMULA 2
IOCM-ACQUIRED-1
IOCM ACQUIRED INTEREST FORMULA 1
IOCM-ACQUIRED-2
IOCM ACQUIRED INTEREST FORMULA 2
IOCM-ACR_ADJ-1
IOCM ACR - ADJ - FORMULA 1
IOCM-ACR_ADJ-2
IOCM ACR - ADJ - FORMULA 2
IOCM-PNL_ADJ-1
IOCM PNL - ADJ - FORMULA 1
IOCM-PNL_ADJ-2
IOCM PNL - ADJ - FORMULA 2
IOCM-PNL-1
IOCM INCOME/EXPENSE A/C FORMULA 1
IOCM-PNL-2
IOCM INCOME/EXPENSE A/C FORMULA 2
IOCP-ACCR-1
IOCP ACCRUAL A/C - FORMULA 1
IOCP-ACCR-3
IOCP ACCRUAL A/C - FORMULA 3
IOCP-ACQUIRED-1
IOCP ACQUIRED INTEREST FORMULA 1
IOCP-ACQUIRED-3
IOCP ACQUIRED INTEREST FORMULA 3
IOCP-ACR_ADJ-1
IOCP ACR - ADJ - FORMULA 1
IOCP-ACR_ADJ-3
IOCP ACR - ADJ - FORMULA 3
IOCP-PNL_ADJ-1
IOCP PNL - ADJ - FORMULA 1
IOCP-PNL_ADJ-3
IOCP PNL - ADJ - FORMULA 3
IOCP-PNL-1
IOCP INCOME/EXPENSE A/C FORMULA 1
IOCP-PNL-3
IOCP INCOME/EXPENSE A/C FORMULA 3
IOSR-ACCR-1
IOSR ACCRUAL A/C - FORMULA 1
17-4
Accounting Role
Description
IOSR-ACCR-2
IOSR ACCRUAL A/C - FORMULA 2
IOSR-ACQUIRED-1
IOSR ACQUIRED INTEREST FORMULA 1
IOSR-ACQUIRED-2
IOSR ACQUIRED INTEREST FORMULA 2
IOSR-ACR_ADJ-1
IOSR ACR - ADJ - FORMULA 1
IOSR-ACR_ADJ-2
IOSR ACR - ADJ - FORMULA 2
IOSR-PNL_ADJ-1
IOSR PNL - ADJ - FORMULA 1
IOSR-PNL_ADJ-2
IOSR PNL - ADJ - FORMULA 2
IOSR-PNL-1
IOSR INCOME/EXPENSE A/C FORMULA 1
IOSR-PNL-2
IOSR INCOME/EXPENSE A/C FORMULA 2
IOSR-TPBL_ADJ-3
IOSR TAX PAY ADJ A/C - FORMULA 3
IOSR-TPBL-3
IOSR TAX PAYABLE A/C - FORMULA 3
17.5 Event-wise Accounting Entries for Products
You can set up various IC products for handling customer accounts. Some representative
products are listed below:
Interest
•
Interest on Saving and Current Bank Accounts for Retail Customer
•
Debit Interest on Current Accounts
•
Interest on Current account for Corporate Customer
•
Interest Liquidation before month end on Saving and Current Bank Accounts For Retail
Customer
•
Interest on Saving and Current Bank Accounts for Retail Customer
•
Charge on Less Average balance
•
Dormancy Charge On Accounts
Charge
•
Ad-Hoc Statement Charge
•
Check Book Charges
•
Checks Returned
•
Credit Turnover
•
Debit Card Blocked
17-5
•
Debit Card Issued
•
Debit Turnover
•
Number of Transactions
•
No of Account Statements
•
Stop Check Charges
•
Turnover
•
YTD-Cr-Turnover
•
YTD - Debit Turnover
•
Year End Transfer
•
Year to date No. of Transactions
17.5.1 Accounting Entries for Interest Products
You can set up accounting entries as given below.
17.5.1.1
Interest on Saving and Current Bank Accounts for Retail Customer
IACR
Accounting Entries
Accounting Role
Amount Tag
Debit/Credit Indicator
IOSR-PNL-1
IACR
Debit
IOSR-ACCR-1
IACR
Credit
IOSR-PNL_ADJ-1
IACR_ADJ
Debit
IOSR-ACR_ADJ-1
IACR_ADJ
Credit
IOSR-PNL-2
IACR
Credit
IOSR-ACCR-2
IACR
Debit
IOSR-PNL_ADJ-2
IACR_ADJ
Credit
IOSR-ACR_ADJ-2
IACR_ADJ
Debit
ILIQ
Accounting Entries
Accounting Role
Amount Tag
Debit/Credit Indicator
IOSR-ACCR-1
ILIQ
Debit
IOSR-BOOK-1
ILIQ
Credit
IOSR-ACQUIRED-1
IACQUIRED
Debit
17-6
Accounting Role
Amount Tag
Debit/Credit Indicator
IOSR-BOOK-1
IACQUIRED
Credit
IOSR-ACCR-2
ILIQ
Credit
IOSR-BOOK-2
ILIQ
Debit
IOSR-ACQUIRED-2
IACQUIRED
Credit
IOSR-BOOK-2
IACQUIRED
Debit
IOSR-TPBL-3
TAX
Credit
IOSR-BOOK-3
TAX
Debit
IOSR-TPBL_ADJ-3
TAX_ADJ
Credit
IOSR-BOOK-3
TAX_ADJ
Debit
17.5.1.2
Debit Interest on Current Accounts
IACR
Accounting Entries
Accounting Role
Amount Tag
Debit/Credit Indicator
IOCP-PNL-1
IACR
Debit
IOCP-ACCR-1
IACR
Credit
IOCP-PNL_ADJ-1
IACR_ADJ
Debit
IOCP-ACR_ADJ-1
IACR_ADJ
Credit
IOCP-PNL-3
IACR
Credit
IOCP-ACCR-3
IACR
Debit
IOCP-PNL_ADJ-3
IACR_ADJ
Credit
IOCP-ACR_ADJ-3
IACR_ADJ
Debit
ILIQ
Accounting Entries
Accounting Role
Amount Tag
Debit/Credit Indicator
IOCP-ACCR-1
ILIQ
Debit
IOCP-BOOK-1
ILIQ
Credit
17-7
Accounting Role
Amount Tag
Debit/Credit Indicator
IOCP-ACQUIRED-1
IACQUIRED
Debit
IOCP-BOOK-1
IACQUIRED
Credit
IOCP-ACCR-3
ILIQ
Credit
IOCP-BOOK-3
ILIQ
Debit
IOCP-ACQUIRED-3
IACQUIRED
Credit
IOCP-BOOK-3
IACQUIRED
Debit
17.5.1.3
Interest on Current account for Corporate Customer
IACR
Accounting Entries
Accounting Role
Amount Tag
Debit/Credit Indicator
IOCC-PNL-1
IACR
Credit
IOCC-ACCR-1
IACR
Debit
IOCC-PNL_ADJ-1
IACR_ADJ
Credit
IOCC-ACR_ADJ-1
IACR_ADJ
Debit
IOCC-PNL-2
IACR
Debit
IOCC-ACCR-2
IACR
Credit
IOCC-PNL_ADJ-2
IACR_ADJ
Debit
IOCC-ACR_ADJ-2
IACR_ADJ
Credit
ILIQ
Accounting Entries
Accounting Role
Amount Tag
Debit/Credit Indicator
IOCC-ACCR-1
ILIQ
Credit
IOCC-BOOK-1
ILIQ
Debit
IOCC-ACQUIRED-1
IACQUIRED
Credit
IOCC-BOOK-1
IACQUIRED
Debit
17-8
Accounting Role
Amount Tag
Debit/Credit Indicator
IOCC-ACCR-2
ILIQ
Debit
IOCC-BOOK-2
ILIQ
Credit
IOCC-ACQUIRED-2
IACQUIRED
Debit
IOCC-BOOK-2
IACQUIRED
Credit
IOCC-TPBL-3
TAX
Credit
IOCC-BOOK-3
TAX
Debit
IOCC-TPBL_ADJ-3
TAX_ADJ
Credit
IOCC-BOOK-3
TAX_ADJ
Debit
17.5.1.4
Interest Liquidation before month end on Saving and Current Bank
Accounts For Retail Customer
IACR
Accounting Entries
Accounting Role
Amount Tag
Debit/Credit Indicator
IBSR-PNL-1
IACR
Debit
IBSR-ACCR-1
IACR
Credit
IBSR-PNL_ADJ-1
IACR_ADJ
Debit
IBSR-ACR_ADJ-1
IACR_ADJ
Credit
IBSR-PNL-2
IACR
Credit
IBSR-ACCR-2
IACR
Debit
IBSR-PNL_ADJ-2
IACR_ADJ
Credit
IBSR-ACR_ADJ-2
IACR_ADJ
Debit
ILIQ
Accounting Entries
Accounting Role
Amount Tag
Debit/Credit Indicator
IBSR-ACCR-1
ILIQ
Debit
IBSR-BOOK-1
ILIQ
Credit
17-9
Accounting Role
Amount Tag
Debit/Credit Indicator
IBSR-ACQUIRED-1
IACQUIRED
Debit
IBSR-BOOK-1
IACQUIRED
Credit
IBSR-ACCR-2
ILIQ
Credit
IBSR-BOOK-2
ILIQ
Debit
IBSR-ACQUIRED-2
IACQUIRED
Credit
IBSR-BOOK-2
IACQUIRED
Debit
IBSR-TPBL-3
TAX
Credit
IBSR-BOOK-3
TAX
Debit
IBSR-TPBL_ADJ-3
TAX_ADJ
Credit
IBSR-BOOK-3
TAX_ADJ
Debit
17.5.1.5
Interest on Saving and Current Bank Accounts for Retail Customer
IACR
Accounting Entries
Accounting Role
Amount Tag
Debit/Credit Indicator
IOCM-PNL-1
IACR
Debit
IOCM-ACCR-1
IACR
Credit
IOCM-PNL_ADJ-1
IACR_ADJ
Debit
IOCM-ACR_ADJ-1
IACR_ADJ
Credit
IOCM-PNL-2
IACR
Credit
IOCM-ACCR-2
IACR
Debit
IOCM-PNL_ADJ-2
IACR_ADJ
Credit
IOCM-ACR_ADJ-2
IACR_ADJ
Debit
ILIQ
Accounting Entries
Accounting Role
Amount Tag
Debit/Credit Indicator
IOCM-ACCR-1
ILIQ
Debit
17-10
Accounting Role
Amount Tag
Debit/Credit Indicator
IOCM-BOOK-1
ILIQ
Credit
IOCM-ACQUIRED-1
IACQUIRED
Debit
IOCM-BOOK-1
IACQUIRED
Credit
IOCM-ACCR-2
ILIQ
Credit
IOCM-BOOK-2
ILIQ
Debit
IOCM-ACQUIRED-2
IACQUIRED
Credit
IOCM-BOOK-2
IACQUIRED
Debit
17.5.1.6
Charge on Less Average balance
ILIQ
Accounting Entries
Accounting Role
Amount Tag
Debit/Credit Indicator
CHAV-TPBL_ADJ-2
TAX_ADJ
Credit
CHAV-BOOK-1
IACQUIRED
Debit
CHAV-BOOK-2
TAX
Debit
CHAV-TPBL-2
TAX
Credit
CHAV-PNL-1
ILIQ
Credit
CHAV-BOOK-1
ILIQ
Debit
CHAV-PNL_ADJ-1
IACQUIRED
Credit
CHAV-BOOK-2
TAX_ADJ
Debit
17.5.1.7
Dormancy Charge On Accounts
ILIQ
Accounting Entries
Accounting Role
Amount Tag
Debit/Credit Indicator
DORM-PNL-1
ILIQ
Credit
DORM-BOOK-1
IACQUIRED
Debit
DORM-BOOK-1
ILIQ
Debit
17-11
Accounting Role
Amount Tag
Debit/Credit Indicator
DORM-PNL_ADJ-1
IACQUIRED
Credit
17.5.1.8
Ad-Hoc Statement Charge
CLIQ
Accounting Entries
Accounting Role
Amount Tag
Debit/Credit Indicator
CHG_BOOK
CHARGE
Debit
CHG_INCOME
CHARGE
Credit
17.5.1.9
Check Book Charges
CLIQ
Accounting Entries
Accounting Role
Amount Tag
Debit/Credit Indicator
CHG_BOOK
CHARGE
Debit
CHG_INCOME
CHARGE
Credit
17.5.1.10
Checks Returned
CIQ
Accounting Entries
Accounting Role
Amount Tag
Debit/Credit Indicator
CHG_BOOK
CHARGE
Debit
CHG_INCOME
CHARGE
Credit
17.5.1.11
Credit Turnover
CLIQ
Accounting Entries
Accounting Role
Amount Tag
Debit/Credit Indicator
CHG_BOOK
CHARGE
Debit
CHG_INCOME
CHARGE
Credit
17-12
17.5.1.12
Debit Card Blocked
CLIQ
Accounting Entries
Accounting Role
Amount Tag
Debit/Credit Indicator
CHG_BOOK
CHARGE
Debit
CHG_INCOME
CHARGE
Credit
17.5.1.13
Debit Card Issued
CLIQ
Accounting Entries
Accounting Role
Amount Tag
Debit/Credit Indicator
CHG_BOOK
CHARGE
Debit
CHG_INCOME
CHARGE
Credit
17.5.1.14
Debit Turnover
CLIQ
Accounting Entries
Accounting Role
Amount Tag
Debit/Credit Indicator
CHG_BOOK
CHARGE
Debit
CHG_INCOME
CHARGE
Credit
17.5.1.15
Number of Transactions
CLIQ
Accounting Entries
Accounting Role
Amount Tag
Debit/Credit Indicator
CHG_INCOME
CHARGE
Debit
CHG_BOOK
CHARGE
Credit
17-13
17.5.1.16
No of Account Statements
CLIQ
Accounting Entries
Accounting Role
Amount Tag
Debit/Credit Indicator
CHG_INCOME
CHARGE
Debit
CHG_BOOK
CHARGE
Credit
17.5.1.17
Stop Check Charges
CLIQ
Accounting Entries
Accounting Role
Amount Tag
Debit/Credit Indicator
CHG_INCOME
CHARGE
Debit
CHG_BOOK
CHARGE
Credit
17.5.1.18
Turnover
CLIQ
Accounting Entries
Accounting Role
Amount Tag
Debit/Credit Indicator
CHG_BOOK
CHARGE
Debit
CHG_INCOME
CHARGE
Credit
17.5.1.19
YTD-Cr-Turnover
CLIQ
Accounting Entries
Accounting Role
Amount Tag
Debit/Credit Indicator
CHG_BOOK
CHARGE
Debit
CHG_INCOME
CHARGE
Credit
17-14
17.5.1.20
YTD - Debit Turnover
CLIQ
Accounting Entries
Accounting Role
Amount Tag
Debit/Credit Indicator
CHG_BOOK
CHARGE
Debit
CHG_INCOME
CHARGE
Credit
17.5.1.21
Year End Transfer
CLIQ
Accounting Entries
Accounting Role
Amount Tag
Debit/Credit Indicator
CHG_BOOK
CHARGE
Debit
CHG_INCOME
CHARGE
Credit
17.5.1.22
Year to date No. of Transactions
CLIQ
Accounting Entries
Accounting Role
Amount Tag
Debit/Credit Indicator
CHG_BOOK
CHARGE
Debit
CHG_INCOME
CHARGE
Credit
17-15
18. Annexure C - IC Rule Set-up
18.1 Introduction
This Annexure lists the Interest and Charge (IC) rules that need to be maintained for the CASA
module of Oracle FLEXCUBE. It also gives the UDEs and rates for which values need to be
maintained.
18.2 IC Rule Maintenance
The components required to calculate interest (the principal, period, and rate) are broadly
referred to as ‘Data Elements’. Data elements are of two types:
•
System Data Elements (SDEs)
•
User Data Elements (UDEs)
In addition to specifying how the SDEs and UDEs are connected through the formulae, you also
define certain other attributes for a rule using the ‘Interest and Charges Rule Maintenance’
screen. You can invoke this screen by typing ‘ICDRLMNT’ in the field at the top right corner of the
Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button.
For details about the screen, refer the chapter ‘Maintaining Interest Rules’ in the Interest and
Charges User Manual.
You can maintain rules for the following:
•
Interest on Saving and Current Bank Accounts for Retail Customer
•
Debit Interest on Current Accounts
18-1
•
Interest on Current account for Corporate Customer
•
Interest on Saving and Current Bank Accounts for Retail Customer
•
Charge as Dr Interest when the balance is Less than minimum average balance
•
Dormancy Charge
18.2.1 Interest on Saving and Current Bank Accounts for Retail Customer
Specify the following details:
On Account Opening Month
Check this box.
On Account Closure Month
Check this box.
SDE
Maintain the following SDEs:
•
DAYS
•
VD_DLY_CR_BAL_M
•
YEAR
•
VD_DLY_DR_BAL_M
UDE
Maintain the following UDEs:
User Defined Elements
Type
NORMAL_RATE1
Rate
NORMAL_RATE2
Rate
NORMAL_RATE3
Rate
NORMAL_RATE4
Rate
AMOUNT1
Amount
AMOUNT2
Amount
AMOUNT3
Amount
TAX1
Rate
18-2
Get Latest
For each of the UDEs, select the option ‘Use Effective’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Click ‘Formulas’ button and invoke the ‘Formulas’ screen.
You need to maintain two booked formulae and one tax formula.
Formula 1
Specify the following details:
Periodicity
Select ‘Daily’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Book Flag
Select ‘Booked’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Debit/Credit
Select ‘Credit’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Days in a Month
Select ‘Actuals’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Days in a Year
Select ‘365’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Accrual Required
Check this box.
18-3
Rounding Required
Check this box.
Click ‘Formula Wizard’ button and invoke the ‘Formula Wizard’ screen.
In this screen, specify the following expressions:
Case
Result
(VD_DLY_CR_BAL_M >=0
AND VD_DLY_CR_BAL_M <=
AMOUNT2)
(VD_DLY_CR_BAL_M*NORMAL_RATE1*DAYS)/
(YEAR*100)
(VD_DLY_CR_BAL_M >
AMOUNT2
(VD_DLY_CR_BAL_M*NORMAL_RATE3*DAYS)/
(YEAR*100)
Formula 2
Specify the following details:
Book Flag
Select ‘Booked’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Periodicity
Select ‘Daily’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Debit/Credit
Select ‘Debit’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
18-4
Days in a Month
Select ‘Actuals’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Days in a Year
Select ‘365’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Accrual Required
Check this box.
Rounding Required
Check this box.
Click ‘Formula Wizard’ button and invoke the ‘Formula Wizard’ screen. In this screen, you need to
maintain the following expressions:
Case
Result
VD_DLY_DR_BAL_M
>=AMOUNT3
(VD_DLY_CR_BAL_M*NORMAL_RATE1*DAYS)/
(YEAR*100)
(VD_DLY_DR_BAL_M
<AMOUNT3
(VD_DLY_DR_BAL_M*NORMAL_RATE4*DAYS)/
(YEAR*100)
Formula 3
Specify the following details:
Book Flag
Select ‘Tax’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Periodicity
Select ‘Periodic’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Debit/Credit
Select ‘Debit’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Days in a Month
Select ‘Actuals’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Days in a Year
Select ‘365’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Accrual Required
Leave this box unchecked.
18-5
Rounding Required
Check this box.
Click ‘Formula Wizard’ button and invoke the ‘Formula Wizard’ screen. In this screen, you need to
maintain the following expressions:
Case
Result
FORMULA1 > AMOUNT1
(TRUNC((FORMULA1*TAX1)/100)
(FORMULA1 < AMOUNT1
0
18.2.2 Debit Interest on Current Accounts
Specify the following details:
On Account Opening Month
Check this box.
On Account Closure Month
Check this box.
SDE
Maintain the following SDEs:
•
DAYS
•
DLY_NET_BAL_M
•
YEAR
•
ACCOUNT_LIMIT
UDE
Maintain the following UDEs:
•
NORMAL_RATE1
•
NORMAL_RATE2
•
NORMAL_RATE3
Type
For each of the UDEs, select the option ‘Rate’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Get Latest
For each of the UDEs, select the option ‘Use Effective’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Click ‘Formulas’ button and invoke the ‘Formulas’ screen. You need to maintain two booked
formulae and one non-booked formula.
18-6
Formula 1
Specify the following details:
Book Flag
Select ‘Booked’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Periodicity
Select ‘Periodic’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Debit/Credit
Select ‘Credit’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Days in a Month
Select ‘Actuals’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Days in a Year
Select ‘365’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Accrual Required
Check this box.
Rounding Required
Check this box.
Click ‘Formula Wizard’ button and invoke the ‘Formula Wizard’ screen. In this screen, you need to
maintain the following expression:
Case
Result
DLY_NET_BAL_M > 0
ABS((DLY_NET_BAL_M*NORMAL_RATE1*DAYS)/(YEAR*100))
Formula 2
Specify the following details:
Book Flag
Select ‘Non-Booked’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Periodicity
Select ‘Daily’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Debit/Credit
Select ‘Debit’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Days in a Month
Select ‘Actuals’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
18-7
Days in a Year
Select ‘365’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Rounding Required
Check this box.
Click ‘Formula Wizard’ button and invoke the ‘Formula Wizard’ screen. In this screen, you need to
maintain the following expression:
Case
Result
DLY_NET_BAL_M <0
ABS(DLY_NET_BAL_M)
Formula 3
Specify the following details:
Book Flag
Select ‘Booked’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Periodicity
Select ‘Daily’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Debit/Credit
Select ‘Debit’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Days in a Month
Select ‘Actuals’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Days in a Year
Select ‘365’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Accrual Required
Check this box.
Rounding Required
Check this box.
Click ‘Formula Wizard’ button and invoke the ‘Formula Wizard’ screen. In this screen, you need to
maintain the following expressions:
Case
Result
FORMULA2>
ACCOUNT_LIMIT
ABS((DLY_NET_BAL_M*NORMAL_RATE2*DAYS)
/(YEAR*100))
18-8
Case
Result
FORMULA2<
ACCOUNT_LIMIT
ABS((DLY_NET_BAL_M*NORMAL_RATE3*DAYS)
/(YEAR*100))
18.2.3 Interest on Current account for Corporate Customer
Specify the following details:
On Account Opening Month
Check this box.
On Account Closure Month
Check this box.
SDE
Maintain the following SDEs:
•
DAYS
•
MON_AVG_BAL_M
•
RD_INSTALL_DUE
UDE
Maintain the following UDEs:
User Defined Elements
Type
RATE1
Rate
RATE2
Rate
AMOUNT1
Amount
AMOUNT2
Amount
TAX1
Rate
TAX2
Rate
Get Latest
For each of the UDEs, select the option ‘Use Effective’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Click ‘Formulas’ button and invoke the ‘Formulas’ screen. You need to maintain two booked
formulae and one tax formula.
Formula 1
Specify the following details:
18-9
Book Flag
Select ‘Booked’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Periodicity
Select ‘Periodic’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Debit/Credit
Select ‘Debit’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Days in a Month
Select ‘Actuals’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Days in a Year
Select ‘365’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Accrual Required
Check this box.
Rounding Required
Check this box.
Interest Method Default From Currency Definition
Check this box.
Click ‘Formula Wizard’ button and invoke the ‘Formula Wizard’ screen. In this screen, you need to
maintain the following expression:
Case
Result
( MON_AVG_BAL <0
ABS((MON_AVG_BAL*RATE1*DAYS)/(YEAR*100))
Formula 2
Specify the following details:
Book Flag
Select ‘Booked’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Periodicity
Select ‘Periodic’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Debit/Credit
Select ‘Credit’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Days in a Month
Select ‘Actuals’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
18-10
Days in a Year
Select ‘365’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Accrual Required
Check this box.
Rounding Required
Check this box.
Click ‘Formula Wizard’ button and invoke the ‘Formula Wizard’ screen. In this screen, you need to
maintain the following expression:
Case
Result
MON_AVG_BAL >0
ABS((MON_AVG_BAL*RATE2*DAYS)/(YEAR*100))
Formula 3
Specify the following details:
Book Flag
Select ‘Tax’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Periodicity
Select ‘Periodic’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Debit/Credit
Select ‘Debit’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Days in a Month
Select ‘Actuals’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Days in a Year
Select ‘365’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Accrual Required
Leave the box unchecked.
Rounding Required
Check this box.
Click ‘Formula Wizard’ button and invoke the ‘Formula Wizard’ screen. In this screen, you need to
maintain the following expressions:
Case
Result
18-11
Case
Result
FORMULA2 < AMOUNT1
0
FORMULA2>AMOUNT1
TRUNC((FORMULA2*TAX1)/100)
FORMULA2>AMOUNT2
TRUNC((FORMULA2*TAX2)/100)
18.2.4 Interest on Saving and Current Bank Accounts for Retail Customer
Specify the following details:
On Account Opening Month
Check this box.
On Account Closure Month
Check this box.
SDE
Maintain the following SDEs:
•
DAYS
•
VD_DLY_CR_BAL_M
•
VD_DLY_DR_BAL_M
•
YEAR
UDE
Maintain the following UDEs:
User Defined Elements
Type
NORMAL_RATE1
Rate
NORMAL_RATE2
Rate
NORMAL_RATE3
Rate
NORMAL_RATE4
Rate
AMOUNT1
Amount
AMOUNT2
Amount
AMOUNT3
Amount
TAX1
Rate
18-12
Get Latest
For each of the UDEs, select the option ‘Use Effective’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Click ‘Formulas’ button and invoke the ‘Formulas’ screen. You need to maintain two booked
formulae and one tax formula.
Formula 1
Specify the following details:
Book Flag
Select ‘Booked’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Periodicity
Select ‘Daily’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Debit/Credit
Select ‘Credit’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Days in a Month
Select ‘Actuals’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Days in a Year
Select ‘365’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Accrual Required
Check this box.
Rounding Required
Check this box..
Click ‘Formula Wizard’ button and invoke the ‘Formula Wizard’ screen. In this screen you need to
maintain the following expressions.
Case
Result
VD_DLY_CR_BAL_M >=0
AND VD_DLY_CR_BAL_M <=
AMOUNT2
(VD_DLY_CR_BAL_M*NORMAL_RATE1*DAYS)/
(YEAR*100)
VD_DLY_CR_BAL_M >
AMOUNT2
(VD_DLY_CR_BAL_M*NORMAL_RATE3*DAYS)/
(YEAR*100)
Formula 2
Specify the following details:
18-13
Book Flag
Select ‘Booked’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Periodicity
Select ‘Daily’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Debit/Credit
Select ‘Debit’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Days in a Month
Select ‘Actuals’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Days in a Year
Select ‘365’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Accrual Required
Check this box.
Rounding Required
Check this box.
Click ‘Formula Wizard’ button and invoke the ‘Formula Wizard’ screen. In this screen, you need to
maintain the following expressions:
Case
Result
VD_DLY_DR_BAL_M
>=AMOUNT3
(VD_DLY_DR_BAL_M*NORMAL_RATE2*DAYS)/
(YEAR*100)
(VD_DLY_DR_BAL_M
<AMOUNT3
(VD_DLY_DR_BAL_M*NORMAL_RATE4*DAYS)/
(YEAR*100)
Formula 3
Specify the following details:
Book Flag
Select ‘Tax’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Periodicity
Select ‘Daily’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Debit/Credit
Select ‘Debit’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
18-14
Days in a Month
Select ‘Actuals’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Days in a Year
Select ‘365’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Accrual Required
Leave this box unchecked.
Rounding Required
Check this box.
Click ‘Formula Wizard’ button and invoke the ‘Formula Wizard’ screen. In this screen, you need to
maintain the following expressions:
Case
Result
FORMULA1 > AMOUNT1
(TRUNC((FORMULA1*TAX1)/100)
(FORMULA1 < AMOUNT1
0
18.2.5 Interest on Saving and Current Bank Accounts for Retail Customer
Specify the following details:
On Account Opening Month
Check this box.
On Account Closure Month
Leave this box unchecked.
SDE
Maintain the following SDEs:
•
DAYS
•
VD_DLY_CR_BAL_M
•
VD_DLY_DR_BAL_M
•
YEAR
UDE
Maintain the following UDEs:
User Defined Elements
Type
NORMAL_RATE1
Rate
NORMAL_RATE2
Rate
18-15
User Defined Elements
Type
NORMAL_RATE3
Rate
NORMAL_RATE4
Rate
AMOUNT2
Amount
AMOUNT3
Amount
Get Latest
For each of the UDEs, select the option ‘Use Effective’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Click ‘Formulas’ button and invoke the ‘Formulas’ screen. You need to maintain two booked
formulae.
Formula 1
Specify the following details:
Book Flag
Select ‘Booked’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Periodicity
Select ‘Daily’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Debit/Credit
Select ‘Credit’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Days in a Month
Select ‘Actuals’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Days in a Year
Select ‘365’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Accrual Required
Check this box.
Rounding Required
Check this box.
Click ‘Formula Wizard’ button and invoke the ‘Formula Wizard’ screen. In this screen, you need to
maintain the following expressions:
Case
Result
(VD_DLY_CR_BAL_M*NORMAL_RATE1*DA
YS)/(YEAR*100)
(VD_DLY_CR_BAL_M*NORMAL
_RATE1*DAYS)/(YEAR*100)
18-16
Case
Result
VD_DLY_CR_BAL_M > AMOUNT2
(VD_DLY_CR_BAL_M*NORMAL
_RATE3*DAYS)/(YEAR*100)
Formula 2
Specify the following details:
Book Flag
Select ‘Booked’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Periodicity
Select ‘Daily’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Debit/Credit
Select ‘Debit’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Days in a Month
Select ‘Actuals’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Days in a Year
Select ‘365’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Accrual Required
Check this box.
Rounding Required
Check this box.
Click ‘Formula Wizard’ button and invoke the ‘Formula Wizard’ screen. In this screen, you need to
maintain the following expressions:
Case
Result
VD_DLY_DR_BAL_M
>=AMOUNT3
(VD_DLY_DR_BAL_M*NORMAL_RATE2*DAYS)/(YEAR*100)
VD_DLY_DR_BAL_M
<AMOUNT3
(VD_DLY_DR_BAL_M*NORMAL_RATE4*DAYS)/(YEAR*100)
18.2.6 Charge as Dr Interest when the balance is Less than minimum average
balance
Specify the following details:
On Account Opening Month
Check this box.
18-17
On Account Closure Month
Check this box.
SDE
Maintain the following SDEs:
•
MIN_BAL_REQD
•
MON_AVG_BAL
UDE
Maintain the following UDEs:
User Defined Elements
Type
AVSLAMT1
Amount
AVSLAMT2
Amount
AVSLAMT3
Amount
AVSLAMT4
Amount
AVSLAMT5
Amount
CHGAMT1
Amount
CHGAMT2
Amount
CHGAMT3
Amount
CHGAMT4
Amount
CHGAMT5
Amount
TAX3
Rate
Get Latest
For each of the UDEs, select the option ‘Use Effective’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Click ‘Formulas’ button and invoke the ‘Formulas’ screen. You need to maintain one booked
formula and one tax formula.
Formula 1
Specify the following details:
Book Flag
Select ‘Booked’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
18-18
Periodicity
Select ‘Periodic’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Debit/Credit
Select ‘Debit’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Days in a Month
Select ‘Actuals’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Days in a Year
Select ‘365’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Accrual Required
Leave this box unchecked.
Rounding Required
Check this box.
Click ‘Formula Wizard’ button and invoke the ‘Formula Wizard’ screen. In this screen, you need to
maintain the following expressions:
Case
Result
MON_AVG_BAL >0 AND MON_AVG_BAL > MIN_BAL_REQD
0
MON_AVG_BAL < AVSLAMT1
CHGAMT1
MON_AVG_BAL < AVSLAMT2 AND MON_AVG_BAL > AVSLAMT1
CHGAMT2
MON_AVG_BAL < AVSLAMT3 AND MON_AVG_BAL > AVSLAMT2
CHGAMT3
MON_AVG_BAL < AVSLAMT4 AND MON_AVG_BAL > AVSLAMT3
CHGAMT4
MON_AVG_BAL < AVSLAMT5 AND MON_AVG_BAL > AVSLAMT4
CHGAMT5
Formula 2
Specify the following details:
Book Flag
Select ‘Tax’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Periodicity
Select ‘Periodic’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Debit/Credit
Select ‘Debit’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
18-19
Days in a Month
Select ‘Actuals’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Days in a Year
Select ‘365’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Accrual Required
Leave this box unchecked.
Rounding Required
Check this box.
Click ‘Formula Wizard’ button and invoke the ‘Formula Wizard’ screen. In this screen, you need to
maintain the following expression:
Case
Result
FORMULA1 >0 AND FORMULA1 < MON_AVG_BAL
TRUNC((FORMULA1*TAX3)/100)
18.2.7 Dormancy Charge
Specify the following details:
On Account Opening Month
Check this box.
On Account Closure Month
Check this box.
SDE
Maintain the following SDEs:
•
AC_DORMANCY_DAYS
•
AC_DORMANT
UDE
Maintain the following UDEs:
•
DORM_CH_PER_DAY1,
•
DORM_CH_PER_DAY2
Type
For each of the UDEs, select the option ‘Amount’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Get Latest
For each of the UDEs, select the option ‘Use Effective’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
18-20
Click ‘Formulas’ button and invoke the ‘Formulas’ screen. You need to maintain one booked
formula.
Formula 1
Specify the following details:
Book Flag
Select ‘Booked’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Periodicity
Select ‘Daily’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Debit/Credit
Select ‘Debit’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Days in a Month
Select ‘Actuals’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Days in a Year
Select ‘Actuals’ from the adjoining drop-down list.
Accrual Required
Leave this box unchecked.
Rounding Required
Check this box.
Click ‘Formula Wizard’ button and invoke the ‘Formula Wizard’ screen. In this screen, you need to
maintain the following expressions:
Case
Result
AC_DORMANT =1 AND
(AC_DORMANCY_DAYS >=1 AND
AC_DORMANCY_DAYS <=30)
AC_DORMANCY_DAYS*DORM_CH_PER_DAY1
AC_DORMANT =1 AND
AC_DORMANCY_DAYS >30
AC_DORMANCY_DAYS*DORM_CH_PER_DAY2
18.3 UDE Value Maintenance
You can maintain UDE values for the rules using the ‘Interest and Charges User Data Element
Maintenance’ screen. You can invoke the ‘Interest and Charges User Data Element Maintenance’
screen by typing ‘ICDUDVAL’ in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and
clicking the adjoining arrow button.
18-21
For details about the screen, refer the chapter ‘Giving UDE Values for Condition’ in the Interest
and Charges User Manual.
In this screen, you need to maintain the following UDEs for the different IC products. Assume that
you have maintained the following interest products:
•
Interest on Saving and Current Bank Accounts for Retail Customer
•
Debit Interest on Current Accounts
•
Interest on Current account for Corporate Customer
•
Interest Liquidation before month end on Saving and Current Bank Accounts For Retail
Customer
•
Interest On Saving and Current Bank Accounts For Retail Customer
•
Charge On Less Average Balance
18.3.1 Interest on Saving and current Bank Accounts for Retail Customer
You need to maintain values for the following UDEs under this product:
•
NORMAL_RATE1
•
NORMAL_RATE2
•
NORMAL_RATE3
•
NORMAL_RATE4
•
AMOUNT1
•
AMOUNT2
•
AMOUNT3
•
TAX1
18-22
18.3.2 Debit Interest on Current Accounts
You need to maintain values for the following UDEs under this product:
•
NORMAL_RATE1
•
NORMAL_RATE2
•
NORMAL_RATE3
18.3.3 Interest on Current account for Corporate Customer
You need to maintain values for the following UDEs under this product:
•
RATE1
•
RATE2
•
AMOUNT1
•
AMOUNT2
•
TAX1
•
TAX2
18.3.4 Interest on Liqd Before Month End on Saving and Current Bank Accounts
For Retail Customer
You need to maintain values for the following UDEs under this product:
•
NORMAL_RATE1
•
NORMAL_RATE2
•
NORMAL_RATE3
•
NORMAL_RATE4
•
AMOUNT1
•
AMOUNT2
•
AMOUNT3
•
TAX1
18.3.5 Interest on Saving and Current Bank Accounts For Retail Customer
You need to maintain values for the following UDEs under this product:
•
NORMAL_RATE1
•
NORMAL_RATE2
•
NORMAL_RATE3
•
NORMAL_RATE4
•
AMOUNT2
•
AMOUNT3
18.3.6 Charge On Less Average Balance
You need to maintain values for the following UDEs under this product:
18-23
•
AVSLAMT5
•
AVSLAMT4
•
AVSLAMT3
•
CHGAMT3
•
CHGAMT2
•
CHGAMT1
•
AVSLAMT2
•
CHGAMT4
•
CHGAMT3
•
CHGAMT2
•
AVSLAMT1
•
TAX3
•
CHGAMT5
•
CHGAMT4
•
CHGAMT3
•
CHGAMT2
•
CHGAMT1
•
TAX3
•
CHGAMT5
•
CHGAMT4
•
AVSLAMT5
•
AVSLAMT1
•
TAX3
•
CHGAMT5
•
AVSLAMT4
•
AVSLAMT3
•
AVSLAMT2
•
CHGAMT2
•
CHGAMT1
•
CHGAMT4
•
CHGAMT3
•
AVSLAMT5
•
AVSLAMT2
•
AVSLAMT1
•
AVSLAMT4
•
AVSLAMT3
•
CHGAMT5
•
AVSLAMT4
•
AVSLAMT3
•
CHGAMT1
18-24
•
AVSLAMT5
•
AVSLAMT2
•
AVSLAMT1
•
TAX3
•
DORM_CH_PER_DAY2
•
DORM_CH_PER_DAY2
•
DORM_CH_PER_DAY1
•
DORM_CH_PER_DAY1
•
DORM_CH_PER_DAY1
•
DORM_CH_PER_DAY2
•
DORM_CH_PER_DAY2
•
DORM_CH_PER_DAY1
•
DORM_CH_PER_DAY1
•
DORM_CH_PER_DAY2
•
DORM_CH_PER_DAY2
•
DORM_CH_PER_DAY1
•
DORM_CH_PER_DAY2
•
DORM_CH_PER_DAY1
•
DORM_CH_PER_DAY1
•
DORM_CH_PER_DAY2
18.4 IC Rates Maintenance
You can maintain rate codes for branches using the ‘Interest and Charges Branch Availability
Maintenance’ screen. You can invoke this screen by typing ‘ICDRESTR’ in the field at the top
right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button.
You need to maintain the following rate code for all branches of your bank:
18-25
•
FLOATRATE
For the aforesaid rate code, you need to maintain rates and effective dates in the ‘Interest and
Charges Rate Input’ screen. You can invoke the ‘Interest and Charges Rate Input’ screen by
typing ‘ICDRATES’ in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the
adjoining arrow button.
These rates are picked up by the CASA module while processing interest applicable on a
Savings/Checking.
Refer the chapter ‘Floating Rate Codes for IC Module’ for details about rate maintenance.
18-26
Current and Savings Account
[March] [2011]
Version 1.0
Oracle Corporation
World Headquarters
500 Oracle Parkway
Redwood Shores, CA 94065
U.S.A.
Worldwide Inquiries:
Phone: +1.650.506.7000
Fax: +1.650.506.7200
www.oracle.com/ financial_services/
Copyright © [2010] Oracle Financial Services Software Limited. All rights reserved.
No part of this work may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, adopted or transmitted in any form or by any means,
electronic, mechanical, photographic, graphic, optic recording or otherwise, translated in any language or computer
language, without the prior written permission of Oracle Financial Services Software Limited.
Due care has been taken to make this document and accompanying software package as accurate as possible. However,
Oracle Financial Services Software Limited makes no representation or warranties with respect to the contents hereof and
shall not be responsible for any loss or damage caused to the user by the direct or indirect use of this document and the
accompanying Software System. Furthermore, Oracle Financial Services Software Limited reserves the right to alter,
modify or otherwise change in any manner the content hereof, without obligation of Oracle Financial Services Software
Limited to notify any person of such revision or changes.
All company and product names are trademarks of the respective companies with which they are associated.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement